System Administrators Guide PDF

Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation - Release 7.
System Administrator's Guide

9150-953-231-NA - Release 2.0 - February 1997
Contents ©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation
Distributed Courtesy of
http://www.promemoinc.com
P.O. Box 1899

Brentwood, CA 94513
Main: (925) 513-7510
Fax: (925) 775-7039
Support: support@promemoinc.com
Sales: sales@promemoinc.com
General: info@promemoinc.com
©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 1

Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation - Release 7.0
1 Introduction
MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER is a voice processing system that provides voice messaging
capabilities and personal mailboxes. As the system administrator, you are responsible for
creating and maintaining software files for all mailboxes on the system (the server). You must
perform the following functions:
• Create and modify mailboxes
• Delete and reassign mailboxes
• Perform routine maintenance of software files
• Change the system time and date
• Establish system security
Additional administrative responsibilities may include the following activities:

• Bill clients
• Run reports
• Build classes of service
• Establish programming for pagers
• Set up system-wide distribution lists
• Create messages, greetings, and tutorials
This manual contains Instructions on how to perform these functions.
Although you can perform many procedures by using the telephone, most administration is
performed from a system maintenance console. Console administration is a menu-driven
procedure; the starting point is the console Main Menu. From this menu, you can choose one of
three sub-menus that allow you to change mailbox data files, perform system maintenance, or run
reports. Once you begin one of these tasks, the system issues prompts for specific information.
You may type a question mark (?) in response to prompts to receive online help.
If you are a new system administrator, you should read Chapter 2, "First Administration Session,"
which provides useful information about this system, in general, and your system, in particular.
For a more thorough understanding of mailboxes, read Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide,"
and Chapter 4, "Mailbox Maintenance."
Once you are familiar with the system, follow the prompts in order to perform administration.
Refer to the complete set of technical practices for additional information on topics covered in this
manual.

2 First Administration Session

This chapter provides basic information to begin system administration from the console. You will
learn how to
• Activate the console
• Enter a console passcode
• Set the site name, code, and banner
• Generate and read the system Configuration Report
The Configuration Report displays information you must know about the system's software
before you can create and maintain mailboxes.
• Shut down the console
• Set up a logbook
Step 1: Activate the Console

To activate the console:
1. Type root (in lowercase letters) at the login prompt to activate the console.
The system prompts you for your passcode.
2. Type your console passcode, if required. If you do not have a passcode, you are logged in.
Each time you login, the system displays the console Main Menu, last login information, and
system status. The following output displays this information. Your system may have
additional options depending on its configuration
Using //1/dev/ser1. Last login: Fri Feb 9 10:14:48 1996.

Starting console
(c) All Software Copyright 1983, 1995 Centigram Comm. Corp. All Rights Reserved.
<System Status>
HOST : 1
STATUS : ENA
OS VSN : 4.22C
MEMORY : 05024/16000
LOG DATA: Y
Disk 0 Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3
Bus 0 : ENA - - -
MAIN MENU
(M) Mailbox Maintenance
(R) Report Generation
(S) System Maintenance
(X) Exit
If you need help later, type ?

COMMAND (M/R/X/X):

Note: The MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER system is factory set to use console terminals that run at 9600
baud. If you see a display of nonsense characters when you activate the console, it means
that the system is trying to run the console at the wrong baud rate. When this occurs, press the
space bar. The system automatically determines the correct baud rate for the console device that
you are using and displays the Main Menu. The system remembers this new baud rate when you
activate the console again; therefore, if you never replace your existing console with one that runs at
a different baud rate, you will not have to reset the console baud rate. The factory default setting
may be changed in the System Maintenance Menu (enter P from the Additional Options Menu).
How Do I Display the Complete Menu?

After most maintenance console functions are performed, the system returns to a shortened
version of the menu. To display the complete menu, press the <Enter> key. To return to the
previous menu or Main Menu, you must enter X to exit.
My System is Locked; How Do I Continue?

Occasionally, the system may appear to be "locked". When this happens, press
CTRL- Q to continue console maintenance functions.
Step 2: Passcode-Protect the Console

The time that you spend performing administration is valuable; protect your investment with a
confidential passcode. To enter the first console passcode for a new system or to change an
existing passcode:
1. Activate the console. (Step 1)
The system displays the Main Menu.
MAIN MENU
(M) Mailbox Maintenance
(R) Report Generation
(S) System Maintenance
(X) Exit
2. Enter S to access the System Maintenance Menu.

The system displays the System Maintenance Menu.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
(A) Automatic Wakeup
(B) Automated Receptionist Extensions
(F) Floppy Backup
(G) Resynchronize HIS PMS Room Status
(H) Hard Disk Utilities
(M) Manual Message Purge
(N) Site Name, Code, Banner
(O) Additional Options
(P) Passwords/Security
(R) Reconfiguration
(S) System Shutdown
(T) Module Status

(U) System Verify

(V) Event Recorder
(W) Network Menu
(X) Exit
3. Enter P to access the console Passwords/Security Menu.

PASSWORDS AND SECURITY
(C) Change Password
(A) Add User
(D) Delete User
(M) Modify User Data
(L) List Users
(R) Reset User Password
(F) Activate FPSA
(T) Audit Trail Menu
(X) Exit
4. Enter C to change the console passcode.

The system prompts:
Changing password for root.
Enter new password.
5. Type a passcode that you can easily remember.
The console passcode may be six to 30 alphanumeric characters. The letters may be upper
or lowercase. Write down the passcode, and store it in a secure place. (See the following
Note.)
The system prompts you to re-enter the new passcode.

6. Re-type your new passcode.
The system reports that the password changed and returns to the shortened version of the
Main Menu.
Note: If you forget the console passcode, you must enter a new one by using the Console program on the
Maintenance diskette. To use this program, you must perform a system shut down which terminates
call processing. After you access the console through this program, you must enter a new console
passcode, exit the program, and reset the system to resume call processing. (See Chapter 15,
"System Security.")
The passcode that you have set is the console passcode; administration by phone requires a
separate phone passcode. Instructions for setting a passcode for phone administration are
provided in Chapter 8, "Administration by Phone."
When FPSA is activated, additional restrictions apply to console passcodes. See "Functionally
Partitioned System Administration (FPSA)".
Use this procedure to enter and delete personal remote passcodes. (see "Passcode".)

Step 3: Name Your Site

The name of the site is printed at the top of all reports. A site name is required to successfully
complete a backup to floppy diskette. To name the site, and set the site code and banner:
1. Enter S from the console Main Menu to access the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter N to change the site name.
The system identifies the present site name, code and banner, and displays the menu:
SITE NAME, CODE, BANNER
(N) Change Site Name
(C) Change Site Code
(B) Change Site Banner
(P) Revert to Previous Site Banner
(D) Revert to Default Site Banner
(X) Exit
3. Enter N to change the site name.
Enter Y to change the name; or

Enter N to keep the current name.
The system prompts you to enter a new site name (<CR> for none).
4. If you entered Y at Step 3,
enter the new site name (up to 60 characters long); or
Press <Enter> to make this field blank.
If you entered N, continue to Step 5.
5. Enter C to change the site code.

The system prompts:
Enter ’Y’ to change the site code, ’N’ to keep the current site code.
6. Enter Y to change the code; or
Enter N to keep the current code.
The system prompts you to enter a new site code (<CR> for none).
enter the new site code (up to 10 characters long); or
If you entered N, continue to Step 8.
8. Enter B to change the site banner.

The system prompts:
Enter ’Y’ to change the site banner, ’N’ to keep the current site banner.
9. Enter Y to change the banner; or
Enter N to keep the current banner.
The system prompts you to enter a new site banner (<CR> for none).

enter the new site banner (up to 240 characters long).
Allow no more than 65 characters on one line. Type . (a period) on a new line and press <CR>, to
indicate the end of the text.
or
The system returns to the shortened System Maintenance Menu.

11. Enter X to exit this menu and return to the console Main Menu.
Step 4: Run the Configuration Report

Before you begin administration, you must become familiar with the features programmed during
the configuration step of system installation. The system configuration information is obtained
from the Configuration Report.
1. Enter R for Report Generation from the Main Menu.

2. Enter C for Configuration from the Reports Menu.
The system displays the Report Output Routing Menu.
REPORT OUTPUT ROUTING
(C) Console
(P) Console with pause
(1) Serial port 1
(2) Serial port 2
(F) File...
(A) Append to file...
(X) Exit (no report)
3. Enter the appropriate report destination (see the next section, "Step 5: Select a Report
Destination.")
The system runs the report and sends the output to the specified destination.
Step 5: Select a Report Destination

If your system is reconfigured with a video display terminal, or if you require output from a
particular printer, you may connect a printer to serial port 2. However, note that this port may be
in use for integrations or message waiting indicators.
• Serial Port 2 Connector - RS-232C connector
• Serial Port 1 (Console) Connector - provides connections to console
When you run the report, the system prompts you to choose a report destination. The report can
be directed to the console or to a serial port; it can be displayed, saved or printed. Choose from
the following options:
Enter C to send the report to the console without pausing.

Enter P to send the report to the console, and pause as the screen fills.
Enter 1 to send the report to serial port #1.
Enter F to send the report to a file on the system.
Enter A to append the report to an existing file on the system.
Enter X to exit report output options (no report).
The system displays the report, 24 lines at a time;

press <Enter> to move ahead.
Enter Q to quit the pausing option.
What Should I Do When a Printer Port is Selected Accidentally?

If S2 is entered and a printer is not connected, the system waits about 20 seconds for a printer to
be connected. Keyboard commands are ignored during this wait state. When the waiting period is
over, the system returns to the Reports Menu.
How Do I Control Scrolling During Video Console Display?

If your system is reconfigured with a video display terminal and you do not have a printer
available, you will need to momentarily stop and start the console display in order to collect the
information you need. To control scrolling, select
• CTRL-S to stop scrolling

• CTRL-Q to resume scrolling
• CTRL-C to discontinue the report
When viewing a report:

• Press the space bar to move ahead one page at a time
• Press <Enter> to move ahead one line at a time
• Enter Q when you reach the "END" of the report
Note: When displaying a long report on the console, you may encounter problems pausing the display,
then restarting it. Before displaying a report on your console, it is useful to determine how to control
scrolling your console monitor. For example: if CTRL-S stops scrolling, but CTRL-Q does not restart
scrolling, check whether CTRL-Scroll Lock or Esc Esc displays the prompt "Press any key to
continue..."
Step 6: Read the Configuration Report

Figure 2-1 shows a sample Configuration Report.
Figure 2-1 Sample Configuration Report

The following entries describe the programming for line groups and their associated applications:
1. Dial Plan
The dial plan shows the number of digits, by position, in a valid mailbox number. All
mailboxes beginning with the same digit have the same number of digits.
EXAMPLE: Dial Plan = 4, 0, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 5, 3

Mailbox begins with: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Explanation:
• Mailboxes beginning with the digit 1 are four digits long
(for example, 1129, 1400).
• No mailboxes begin with the digit 2.
• Mailboxes beginning with the digits 3 through 7 are three digits long
(for example, 312, 566, 601).
• Mailboxes beginning with the digit 8 are five digits long
(for example, 83105, 84112).
• Mailboxes beginning with the digit 9 are three digits long
(for example, the administrator’s mailbox is 998).
• Mailboxes cannot begin with the number zero (0), because this leading digit is reserved
for distribution lists.
Note: The MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER system allows you to create a mailbox with an incorrect
number of digits, but the system does not allow you to access the mailbox. Be sure that all of the
mailboxes that you create conform to your system’s dial plan.
The letter V inserted in place of a number, at any position, indicates that the number of allowable
digits (up to 11) for that position is variable. NP Receptionist accepts any extension input with
that leading digit.
The letter A inserted at any position makes that position number the Dial-by-Name access digit.
("Dial-by-Name".)
2. Administrator and Attendant
Administrator’s mailbox has special privileges:

• The administrator’s mailbox day and night greetings are the day and night Company
Greetings. Therefore, never delete the administrator’s mailbox or else you will lose
these greetings and you will only hear the default greetings.
• Distribution lists created from the administrator’s mailbox are system-wide master lists
that can be used by any mailbox on the system.
• Mailboxes can be added, deleted, and modified by using the telephone and the
Telephone Administration Menu. This menu can only be accessed from the
administrator’s mailbox.
Attendant’s mailbox has special privileges:

• The Message of the Day and the Site Tutorial are two different "greetings" that are
recorded by the attendant.
- Only the first attendant’s mailbox that is configured can record the message of the

day and the site tutorial; the other mailboxes are used only for storing unaddressed
messages.
• Unaddressed messages collect in the attendant’s mailbox. Messages may come from
callers who do not know the correct mailbox number.
- If a large number of unaddressed messages is expected, up to five attendant’s
mailboxes may be configured. The Configuration Report shows all attendant’s
mailbox numbers, separated by commas (for example, 999, 910, 911, 912).
- When the first mailbox is full, the system uses the second mailbox until it is full, and
then the system uses the next mailbox until all attendant’s mailboxes are full.
See Chapter 6, "Recording Messages/Greetings/Tutorials."
3. Wait Prompt
The wait prompt—"Please enter a mailbox number or wait"—plays after the company
greeting (administrator's mailbox greeting).
• When customizing a company greeting, the technician may disable the wait prompt to
ensure that the entire greeting is recorded in the same voice.
- Text should be recorded as part of the company greeting any time it is changed.
See "Record the Company Greeting".
4. Message Waiting Indicators (MWI)

When you create a mailbox, you must enter a message waiting type to tell the system how to
activate a user's message waiting indicator when a message is left in that mailbox. Note the
types of message waiting indicators, if any, that your system is configured to support. See
"Message Waiting Types".
• MWI for pagers/message delivery and/or DTMF to PBX message lights that require
dedicated line groups are shown in the report if configured on your system.
5. Key 0 for Login, or for Attendant Access?
If the report says: "Key 0 for attendant transfer during greeting=(N)"
• Users may login by pressing either the 0 key (zero) or the * key (star) and then by
entering their mailbox numbers.
If the report says: "Key 0 for attendant transfer during greeting=(Y)"

• Only the * key (star) can be used for login.
When users press 0 (zero) during a mailbox greeting, they are transferred to the mailbox
attendant (if one was entered while creating the mailbox), or to the system attendant (when a
mailbox attendant does not exist.)
6. Passcode Length
All mailboxes should be passcode-protected. The passcode length controls the maximum
number of digits that can be entered from the telephone. The default passcode is set by the
system technician during configuration.
You can override the configured passcode length by setting a mailbox passcode from the
console; use the Set Passcode/Tutorial command from the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
("Change/Reset Passcodes".)

• To further increase system security, use this option if you want to give the administrator’s
mailbox a telephone passcode with a greater number of digits than other mailboxes on
the system.
For information on security and FPSA, see Chapter 15, "System Security."
7. Day and Night/Weekend hours

Different company greetings can be recorded to play during two time periods.
• Use NP Receptionist to specify different call treatments for day and night answering of
users’ extensions.
8. NP Receptionist
NP Receptionist automatically answers, screens, and redirects calls. See "NP Receptionist
Treatment Types".
9. Dial-by-Name
Feature bit 092 (User will be in Dial-by-Name database) is contained in the mailbox FCOS.
For details on FCOS descriptions and usage, see Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide."
10. Dial an Extension for Callers

Allow Dial an Extension for Callers is normally set to NO.
11. Analog Networking

This is an optional feature.
12. Attendant’s Extension

An attendant extension number is called when assistance is requested by a caller who leaves
a message in a mailbox. It is used by outside callers when they request assistance through
NP Receptionist. (See Attendant extension number.)
13. Pre DN or Attendant Transfer String

The mailbox attendant extension pre-dial index represents a dial string programmed by the
system technician. This entry (S+) is dialed in order to transfer the call, and is required when
the mailbox's extension number is long—such as when the mailbox's extension number is a
number outside the PBX.
See Chapter 4, "Mailbox Maintenance."
14. Pager Systems

Details for this application are provided in Chapter 5, "Pagers and Message Delivery."
Step 7: Shut Down the Console

After you have completed your administration session, be sure to shut down the console.
1. Enter X, from the Main Menu.

The system prompts:
Exit from console menus and log out? [Y/N]
2. Enter Y.

The system displays:

Console shutdown. Press any key to log in.
Banner file (programmed in "Step 3: Name Your Site"), or
Access to this computer system and associated network,
computer resources, or data is restricted to those
who are officially authorized.
Use by unauthorized individuals or for unauthorized
purposes is a violation of federal and/or state law.
The console automatically shuts down after 15 minutes of inactivity. During this interval,
however, anyone may use it.
3. After the console shuts down, type root at the login prompt, and the proper passcode, to
reactivate the console and resume system administration.
Step 8: Set Up a Logbook of Administration Activities

A standard notebook should be used to keep a paper trail of daily functions.
• Record administration and system maintenance activities.
• Log the times and dates of system resets.
Certain system problems can cause the system to reset; it is important for the service
technician to know which resets are due to administration or maintenance activity and which
may be due to a system problem.
• Keep the logbook in an obvious place.
EXAMPLE: The log may have the following format:

Date Time / Initials
Description
2/23/96 10:23 a.m. JD
Modified 314, 327
7:10 a.m.
Ran Verify and reset system after shutdown
3 Mailbox Reference Guide
What is a Mailbox?
Think of a system mailbox as a post office box where voice messages, instead of written memos,
are collected. Company employees become "system users" when they are assigned personal
mailboxes.
To "open" mailboxes, users call the system number, log in (press the * key (star) plus the mailbox
number on the telephone keypad), and enter personal passcodes. From NP Receptionist, users
press the * key (star) plus the mailbox number, again press the * key (star), and enter their

passcodes. In an integrated system, users are taken directly to the passcode prompt.
A range of software tools are available to customize your system.

• Once logged in, the "user functions" users can choose depend on the classes of service
assigned to the mailbox, when you create it.
- Feature bits, grouped into Feature Class of Service (FCOS), allow users to perform
functions or control how the server can be used. One FCOS is assigned to each mailbox.
(See FCOS.)
- Limits Class of Service (LCOS) controls features such as the number and length of
messages stored in a mailbox. One LCOS is assigned to each mailbox. (See LCOS.)
- Group Class of Service (GCOS) is the group management resource that keeps track of
large systems with many groups. GCOS determines which users can send messages or
respond to messages from other users. One GCOS is assigned to each mailbox. (See
GCOS.)
- Network Class of Service (NCOS) controls users’ network access; it is part of the NP Net
Digital Network optional feature. (See Network Class of Service.)
- Restriction Class of Service (RCOS) is an element of NPA/NXX call screening that
restricts mailbox outdials to certain area codes or prefixes within an area code. One
RCOS is assigned to each mailbox. (See Restriction Class of Service.)
- Tenant Class of Service (TCOS) is used with the ESMDI "Multi-Tenant" application to
govern mailbox interaction between user communities. (See Tenant Class of Service.)
• Message Waiting Types specify how users are notified of unplayed messages in mailboxes.
(“Message Waiting Types”.)
• Attendant Extension Numbers are called when assistance is requested by a caller leaving a
message in a mailbox or when outside callers request assistance through NP Receptionist.
(“Required and Optional Mailbox Information”.)
• NP Receptionist processes calls according to individual users’ requests.
- Treatment Types assigned to mailboxes contain most instructions.
(“NP Receptionist Treatment Types”.)
- Mailbox Extension Numbers are checked when callers input an extension number; this is
the actual number that the system dials; it can be programmed when the "extension" is
outside the PBX network (see Programming NP Receptionist to Dial an Outside
"Mailbox’s Extension.)
Details on these mailbox components are provided in Chapter 4, "Mailbox Maintenance."
Outside Callers versus System Users

• An "outside caller" dials the system number, enters a mailbox number, listens to the mailbox
greeting (or to the prompt, "Please leave a message for <name>"), and then leaves a
message.
• A "system user" logs in to his or her own mailbox and uses the make, give, or answer
command to leave a message.
The System Time/Date Stamp for Messages

The system adds the time/date stamp to every message to tell the recipient when the message
was recorded.

• If the user plays the message on the same day that it arrives, only the time is given
(for example: 2:00 p.m.).
• If the user plays the message on a later day within the same week, the day of the week and
the time are given (for example: Monday, 2:00 p.m.).
• If the user plays a message more than a week after it was received, the day of the week, the
date, and the time are given (for example: Monday, May 22, 2:00 p.m.).
Feature Class of Service

Feature Class of Service (FCOS) controls the user's access to mailbox operations and user
options. An FCOS allows the creation of mailboxes with special functions, such as Tree and
Broadcast mailboxes. The software allows the technician or administrator to configure
customized mailbox FCOS.
An FCOS contains one or more "feature bits", each of which controls how the application
software handles different kinds of messages. Feature bits are also referred to as "features";
however, this reference can lead to confusion because many aspects of the system are also
called features.
FCOS Description and Usage

More than 250 feature bits affect call processes, they include: using passcodes, issuing prompts,
and broadcasting messages.
An FCOS is compiled by grouping one or more feature bits. Each mailbox must be assigned an
FCOS; if not, the default FCOS 1 is assigned. You cannot assign a feature bit to a mailbox; you
must assign a feature bit to an FCOS and assign the FCOS to a mailbox.
This chapter describes and categorizes each FCOS, and it lists feature bits you must use in
conjunction with the feature category. A complete description of FCOS feature bits is located in
Chapter 7, Reference and Configuration.
Feature Bit Category Summary

To simplify the process of creating an FCOS, the feature bits are divided into 24 categories,
based on their function. See Table 3-1.
A quick reference to feature bits by category is available in "List of Feature Bits by Category,"
Reference and Configuration.
Table 3-1 Feature Bits Categories
Category Function Category Description

1 Greeting Controls events that occur during or immediately
after playing the mailbox greeting.
2 Login Controls processing when users log in to
mailboxes.

3 Logout Affects users’ logout from a mailbox.

4 Attendant Call Allows users or callers to call the mailbox attendant
while logged in to mailboxes
(for example, pressing 0 (zero) while logged in).
5 Outside Caller Allows prompts and privileges for outside callers to
review, discard and append to their messages. This
category also contains a feature bit that requires
callers to enter access codes before leaving
messages.
6 Prompts Controls processing that allows users to interrupt
(soft play) prompts; it affects some Receptionist
prompts.
7 Receive Messages Controls processing messages that users can and
cannot receive; it notifies users about new
messages.
8 Play Messages Allows users to play messages. This category also
contains notification, time stamp, and
order-of-play features.
9 Answer Messages Has the answer function and the ability to attach
the original message to the answer. (The ability to
mark an answer "confidential" and to activate a
return receipt for the answer, are found under
Message Addressing Options - Category 13).
10 Keep/Discard Controls processing after users play their
Messages messages; namely it is the keep and discard
options.
11 Make Messages Allows users to record (Make) messages and send
to one or more users. This category also contains
two timing feature bits. (The ability to mark a
message "confidential", and to activate a return
receipt for the message are found under Message
Addressing Options - Category 13).
12 Give Messages Allows users to forward (Give) messages to
multiple users, with or without additional comments.
This category also contains receipt feature bits.
(The ability to mark the given message (and
comments, if applicable) "private" and to activate a
return receipt are found under Message Addressing
Options - Category 13).
13 Message Addressing Allows users to add a confidential designation to a
message, to make a message urgent, to request a
return receipt, or to set future delivery.
14 User Options Allows users to reach the User Options Menu, and
record names or greetings, set passcodes, make
distribution lists, activate the user tutorial, allow a
pager, or activate auto-wakeup.
15 User Distribution Lists Required to compile and use distribution lists; and
receive their messages (other than those present in
Category 14).

16 Master Lists Allows system administrators to create and use

master distribution lists. Allows administrators to
make messages for master lists, and to receive
master list messages.
17 Check-In/Check-Out Allows hotel/motel or TAS operators to set up
mailboxes for guests or clients by recording names
or greetings, setting passcodes, or activating
tutorials. Operators can also clear messages after
guests/clients check out.
18 Superuser Creates Tree, Broadcast, and Rotational
mailboxes.
19 Message Waiting Activates primary and secondary message waiting
Indicators indicators.
20 NuPoint Fax Controls use of NuPoint Fax options.
21 Paging and Controls use of paging and message delivery
Message Delivery options.
22 Voice Gateway and E- Controls use of Voice Gateway or the E-mail
mail interface, or the text counter. (Voice Gateway and
E-mail are optional features.)
23 Network and Voice Controls the AMIS Analog or NP Forms optional
Forms features of a server.
24 NP View Allows personal computer users to send, receive,
create, edit, and store voice and fax messages in
the Microsoft Windows environment.
(NP View is an optional feature.)
Category 1: Greeting Feature Bits

Greeting feature bits tell the system what to do, either during or after the mailbox greeting plays.
To allow the mailbox user to record the greeting, the FCOS must also contain feature bits 070
User Options Menu and 072 Record or change mailbox greeting.
060 Ignore DTMF during greeting
062 Hang up immediately after greeting
063 Call mailbox attendant after greeting
064 Call mailbox extension after greeting
065 Play system time after greeting
161 Conditional greetings
162 General greetings
164 Skip/pause greeting in Greeting-only mailbox
224 Auto-Transfer to task before greeting

Category 2: Login Feature Bits

Users enter their mailboxes by using the "Login" process.
Note: Zero is an acceptable login character for a line group only when the Configuration Report shows
"Key 0 for transfer to attendant during greeting = (N)."
001 Login to mailbox
016 Deny recycling with * key
066 Login during greeting in greeting-only mailbox
069 Passcode required for mobile DID
081 Only one correct passcode for login
101-109 Deny login on line groups 1-9
132 Bad passcode lockout if over limit
151 Deny 333 access for mobile DID
152 Deny login within tree
156 Deny login after greeting
160 Caller must enter line group access code
165 Pound key (#) login
218 Passcode not needed on direct calls
219 Login with 0 using cut-through paging
225 Auto-transfer to task upon login
Category 3: Logout Feature Bits

If users are able to log in, they are automatically given the ability to log out, either by entering X,
by hanging up, or by not responding to repeated system prompts. Category 3 contains special
logout features.
003 Return to welcome prompt
009 Automatic logout if no messages/receipts
170 Transfer to Voice Gateway
220 No dial extension, E-mail, or Voice Gateway if unplayed messages
Category 4: Attendant Call Feature Bits

002 Transfer to mailbox attendant

098 Say "Press 0" to caller before beep
159 Say "Press 0 to return to receptionist"
Category 5: Outside Caller Feature Bits

002 Transfer to mailbox attendant
004 Outside caller functions
005 Play outside caller menu prompts
017 Fast line release from outside callers
041 Receive messages from outside callers
051 Do not switch language for outside callers
092 User will be in Dial-by-Name database
098 Say "Press 0" to caller before beep
111-119 Deny message receipt on line groups 1-9
137 Caller must enter access code
160 Caller must enter line group access code
176 Say "Press # for more options" to callers
203 Walkaway Fax for callers
221 Deny caller transfer to E-mail/Voice Gateway
Category 6: Prompts Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that allow you to modify the prompts that users hear; it also
allows users to interrupt (soft play) prompts.
051 Do not switch language for outside callers
082 Soft play (interrupt) message count
083 Soft play (interrupt) most prompts
097 Do not say "I will ring <name>" in NP Receptionist
098 Say "press 0" to caller before beep
131 Don’t say limits of liability statement
133 Don’t say "You may start your message now"
136 Don’t say "End of message"

138 Don’t say "Message complete"
140 Say full date when playing messages
146 Don’t say "NuPoint Voice storage is full"
155 Payphone user/recipient interface
159 Say "Press 0 to return to receptionist"
163 Don’t play message count
176 Say "Press # for more options"
202 Do not play mailbox name or extension number
208 Play recorder tone after CTP or greeting-only
209 Tone only pager mailbox interface
210 Numeric display pager mailbox interface
211 Voice pager mailbox interface
Category 7: Receive Messages Feature Bits

This category specifies the sources from which mailboxes can receive messages.
039 Notification tone when new message arrives
040 Receive messages from other users
041 Receive messages from outside callers
043 Receive the Message of the day
044 Receive user distribution list messages
045 Receive master distribution list messages
046 Announce receipt count at login
047 Notification prompt when new message arrives
088 Receive urgent messages
111-119 Deny message receipt on line groups 1-9
These feature bits prevent callers from leaving messages when callers have gained access
through the restricted port group. The system will support up to nine line group restricted
class of service designations, numbered 111 to 119; all of them may be assigned to the same
FCOS, if desired. The last number of the feature denotes the line group number that is
restricted by adding that feature.
EXAMPLE: If Company A (using Line Group 1) and Company B (using Line Group 2) share a PBX,

Company B's administrator can assign feature bit 111 Deny Message Receipt from Line Group
1 to every FCOS. Assigning feature bit 111 makes sure that callers do not use Company A's
lines to access Company B's mailboxes.
127 Deny receipt of messages before tutorial run
173 Receive cut-through page notify receipt
175 Receive broadcast greeting
179 Receive broadcast name
185 Receive wake-up call notification receipt
190 Receive fax messages
198 Receive fax messages only
199 Auto-receipt for fax send
223 Delay requested receipt for 24 hours
Category 8: Play Messages Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control message playback; it also contains
notification, time stamp, confidential and/or urgent delivery status, and order-of-play bits.
050 Play messages
Play Options
006 Rewind and fast forward during playback
007 Pause in record or play
039 Notification tone when new message arrives
046 Announce receipt count at login
047 Notification prompt when new message arrives
048 No auto-time stamp of unplayed messages
049 No auto-time stamp of played messages
052 Auto-play unplayed messages
057 Play saved messages in FIFO order
058 Play unsaved messages in FIFO order
059 Play unplayed messages first
075 Audit receipt messages
076 Play urgent messages in FIFO order

089 Auto-play all messages (new and saved)
144 Skip forward to next message
145 Message stays in original queue
147 Send receipt after full play
153 Don't jump to new message from saved queue
204 Message skip, forward and backward
215 Don't auto-play first message (w/auto-play)
216 Play receipts after urgent messages
255 Delete mailbox without unplayed messages
Category 9: Answer Messages Feature Bits

This category controls the answer function. Messages can be answered when they are sent, via
the make or give command, from another system user's mailbox. Messages can also be
answered when another system user (who responds to the call screening prompt by entering the
* key (star) plus his or her mailbox number) leaves a message through the NP Receptionist port.
This category also contains attach-message feature bits.
029 Answer messages
019 Answer and mark urgent
030 Answer and request receipt
031 Answer and mark confidential
038 Attach original message to answer
158 Continue sending message (* key)
Category 10: Keep or Discard Messages Feature Bits

These feature bits control what users do with messages after they play them. All Keep/Discard
options require 050 Play. If a mailbox can receive messages, the keep and/or discard option (bits
053/055) must be activated for the mailbox to issue consecutive messages during a single login.
053 Keep messages
054 Auto-Keep messages
055 Discard messages
056 Auto-Discard messages

145 Message stays in original queue
227 Undelete last message with * key
Category 11: Make Messages Feature Bits

The Make Messages category contains feature bits that control processing when the user records
a message and wants to send it to a single user or to numerous users. This category also
contains two timing bits.
020 Make messages
021 Make and request receipt
022 Make to multiple destinations
023 Make and mark confidential
032 Make to user distribution list
034 Make to master distribution list
061 Wait to record (timeout = # key)
087 Make and mark urgent
092 User will be in Dial-by-Name database
096 Make messages before Keep/Discard
110 Make/Give to telephone number
126 Make/Give to mailbox with empty GCOS
157 Repeat message for answering machine
171 Cut-through paging
172 Cut-through paging and messaging
188 Append # to end of Cut-through page number
191 Make fax messages
Category 12: Give Messages Feature Bits

The Give Messages category contains bits that control processing when users want to forward
received messages, with or without additional comments, to one or numerous users. This
category also contains receipt bits.
024 Give messages

086 Give receipt messages
018 Give and mark urgent
025 Give and request receipt
026 Give to multiple destinations
027 Give and mark confidential
028 Give with comments
033 Give to user distribution list
035 Give to master distribution list
061 Wait to record (timeout = # key)
084 Give receipt message with comments
085 Give receipt messages to multiple destinations
110 Make/Give to telephone number
126 Make/Give to mailbox with empty GCOS
157 Repeat message for answering machine
192 Give fax messages
Category 13: Message Addressing Feature Bits

The Message addressing category contains feature bits that control processing after the user
makes, gives, or answers a message; therefore, these bits are used when the user wants to mark
a message confidential and/or urgent or when the user wants to request a return receipt.
018 Give and mark urgent
019 Answer and mark urgent
021 Make and request receipt
023 Make and mark confidential
025 Give and request receipt
027 Give and mark confidential
030 Answer and request receipt
031 Answer and mark confidential
087 Make and mark urgent

095 Mark message for future delivery
Category 14: User Options Feature Bits

070 User Options Menu
This feature bit allows the user to press U in the Main Menu to access the user options. After
you assign this feature, you can give it any combination of the specific User Options.
Individual User Options

015 Change wake-up options
071 Record or change mailbox name
072 Record or change mailbox greeting
073 Enter and change mailbox passcode
074 Create or modify user distribution list
077 Change pager schedule
078 Activate user tutorial
093 Deny change of passcode in first tutorial
094 Change message delivery options
095 Mark message for future delivery
124 Change paging phone number
125 Clear user passcode
127 Deny receipt of messages before tutorial run
130 Passcode cannot be same as mailbox
142 Must run tutorial from own phone (SMDI)
143 Change message delivery phone number
148 Change auto-wakeup phone number
180 Record personal wakeup message
195 Specify fax delivery number
196 Change default fax number
201 Deny trivial passcode
242 Say variable passcode prompts for guest mailbox

Category 15: User Distribution Lists Feature Bits

The user distribution lists category contains feature bits that control processing when the user
wants to create and use distribution lists. Distribution lists designate a group of mailboxes so that
the same message can be sent to every mailbox on the list by entering the distribution list number
as the recipient mailbox.
A user distribution list can have up to 65,535 mailboxes. Each mailbox can have up to 99
distribution lists. User distribution lists can be reached only by someone logged in to the mailbox
where the list is stored.
The following features control these actions:
032 Make to user distribution list
033 Give to user distribution list
036 Auto-receipt for user distribution list messages
Note: The auto-receipt can be canceled by the user if the FCOS also contains feature bits 021
Make/activate return receipt and/or 025 Give/activate return receipt (whichever is appropriate).
044 Receive user distribution list message
074 Create or modify user distribution list
134 Broadcast message waiting status
222 Deny nesting of distribution lists
Category 16: Master Distribution Lists Feature Bits

Master lists are distribution lists stored in the administrator's mailbox. An ordinary user distribution
list can be accessed only by someone logged into the mailbox where the list is stored. Master
lists are accessed by logging into any mailbox and entering the master list number as a
destination for make or give.
Ninety-nine (99) master lists are available. Master list numbers have an extra leading 0 (zero). To
address a message to the administrator's mailbox distribution list 1, users enter 001; for master
list 99, enter 0099.
034 Make to master distribution list
035 Give to master distribution list
045 Receive master distribution list messages
Category 17: Check-In/Check-Out Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control processing when the hotel/motel or TAS operator
sets up a mailbox for a guest or client by recording a name or greeting, setting a passcode, or
activating the tutorial.

The operator can also clear messages after a guest/client checks out.
008 Mailbox can be checked in/out
090 Check in other mailboxes
091 Check out other mailboxes
Category 18: Superuser Feature Bits

The Superuser category contains feature bits that control processing for defining rotational, tree
or broadcast mailboxes. These mailboxes require distribution lists to indicate which child
mailboxes to branch to.
121 Define tree mailbox
122 Define broadcast mailbox
068 Define rotational mailbox
120 Default to first child of tree mailbox
123 Announce broadcast mailbox name
141 Define chain mailbox in Receptionist
152 Deny login within tree
174 Define broadcast greeting mailbox
178 Define broadcast name mailbox
186 Default to last child of tree mailbox
187 Receptionist call-transfer tree mailbox
189 Rotate on full mailbox
229 Play names of list 1 children
231 Passcode broadcast mailbox
232 Allow receipt of passcode broadcast
234 Check message wait status of children
Category 19: Message Waiting Indicators Feature Bits

The Message Waiting Indicators (MWI) category contains feature bits that control processing
when the system administrator wants to activate primary and/or secondary
message-waiting indication.

079 Set message waiting #1 for urgent messages only
This bit activates the primary message waiting indicator for urgent messages only, and not
urgent and unplayed messages.
This bit activates the alternate message waiting indicator for urgent messages only, and not
urgent and unplayed messages.
182 Use primary/alternate as week/weekend for MWI 1
183 Use primary/alternate as week/weekend for MWI 2
205 Do not use text count for message waiting
234 Check message waiting status of children
Category 20: NuPoint Fax Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control processing when the NuPoint Fax feature is being
used.
190 Receive fax messages
191 Make fax messages
192 Give fax messages
193 Deliver fax to default number
194 Deliver fax online
195 Specify fax delivery number
196 Change default fax number
197 Fax-on-demand for greeting-only mailbox
198 Receive fax messages only
199 Auto-receipt for fax send
200 Personal fax cover page
203 Walkaway fax for callers
206 Discard fax message after delivery
207 Fax verify (sending system not self)

230 Deny change of fax cover page options
235 Display FROM filed on fax cover page
236 Display promotional message on fax cover page
237 Automatically deliver fax message to default number
238 End-of-session multiple fax delivery
239 Retrieve all unplayed faxes as user options
240 Receive fax on voice recording timeout
247 No fax call placement prompts
Category 21: Paging and Message Delivery Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control processing when radio pagers or message
delivery are being used. Some bits allow the user to override default schedules or pager
numbers.
077 Change pager schedule
124 Change paging phone number
168 Message waiting 1, pager requeue
169 Message waiting 2, pager requeue
171 Cut-through paging (CTP)
172 Cut-through paging and messaging
173 Receive cut-through page notify receipt
181 Paging over message delivery, MWI 1 over MWI 2
188 Append # to end of cut-through page number
208 Play reorder tone after CTP or greeting-only
209 Tone only pager mailbox interface
210 Numeric display pager mailbox interface
211 Voice pager mailbox interface
212 Send page upon answer, greeting-only mailbox
213 Edit CTP number with * key if no caller menu
219 Login with 0 using cut-through paging

Category 22: Voice Gateway and E-mail Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control processing when the Voice Gateway or E-mail
interface to the server are being used.
154 Announce text (E-mail) message count
170 Transfer to Voice Gateway (VG) system
184 Append mailbox number to Voice Gateway transfer
205 Do not use text count for message waiting
217 Announce text messages without count
220 No dial extension, E-mail, or Voice Gateway if unplayed messages
221 Deny caller transfer to E-mail/Voice Gateway
224 Auto-transfer to task before greeting
225 Auto-transfer to task upon login
226 Auto-transfer to task after unplayed messages
Category 23: Network and NP Forms Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control processing when the AMIS Analog or NP Forms
optional features are being used.
135 Define template mailbox (NP Forms)
139 Template: assume last greeting mailbox FCOS
149 Login to template through rotational mailbox
166 AMIS Analog Networking
Category 24: NP View Feature Bits

This category contains feature bits that control the use of the NP View optional feature which
integrates voice and fax mail with e-mail at the user’s personal computer (Microsoft Windows
desktop). Mailbox owners have an "In Box" window for messages and click a mouse button to
play voice messages.
250 Allow NP View login
251 Allow NP View telephone playback/record
252 Allow NP View client to change mailbox ID

Default Feature Class of Service

Several FCOS are pre-programmed into the default configuration. This section describes the
functions of the default FCOS.
To build customized FCOS, follow the instructions in the section “Customizing Your FCOS”.
Note: All operations that involve interactions with other mailboxes (make, give, answer) are limited to
mailboxes within the same Group Class of Service (GCOS).
FCOS 1—Unlimited
The owner of a mailbox with Unlimited FCOS is permitted to use all user functions except
Message Addressing Options. The user can record name and greeting; change the passcode;
receive messages from outside callers and from others users; play, keep, discard, answer, and
give messages; create distribution lists; and make new messages for other system users, or for
distribution lists.
Although FCOS 1 suits the needs of users with standard applications, it should not be thought of
as truly “unlimited” (which implies that there are no restrictions on the mailbox). More accurately,
FCOS 1 is the basic FCOS for a MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER system.
001 Login to mailbox 002 Transfer to mailbox attendant
003 Return to welcome prompt 004 Outside caller functions
005 Play Outside Caller Menu prompts 006 Rewind and fast-forward during playbck
020 Make messages 024 Give messages
028 Give with comments 029 Answer messages
032 Make to user distribution list 033 Give to user distribution list
034 Make to master distribution list 035 Give to master distribution list
040 Receive messages from other users 041 Receive messages from outside callers
042 Not used 043 Receive Message of the day
044 Receive user distribution list messages 045 Receive master distribution list mssags
050 Play messages 053 Keep messages
055 Discard messages 058 Play unplayed messages in FIFO order
059 Play unplayed messages first 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx
070 User Options Menu 071 Record or change mailbox name
072 Record or change mailbox greeting 073 Enter and change mailbox passcode
074 Create or modify user distribution list 077 Change pager schedule
098 Say “Press 0” to caller before beep 125 Clear user passcode
126 Make/give to mailbox with empty GCOS
FCOS 2—Full Guest

FCOS 2—Full Guest is used in the hotel/motel environment where no Property Management
System (PMS) integration is available. FCOS 2 has fewer capabilities than FCOS 1 (Unlimited);
however, it has feature bits that allow this type of mailbox to be reached by Check-in/Check-out
mailboxes.
005 Play Outside Caller Menu prompts 006 Rewind and fast-forward during playback
008 Mailbox can be checked in/out 020 Make messages
024 Give messages 028 Give with comments
029 Answer messages 032 Make to user distribution list
033 Give to user distribution list 034 Make to master distribution list

035 Give to master distribution list 040 Receive messages from other users
041 Receive messages from outside callers 042 Not used
043 Receive message of the day 044 Receive user distribution list messages
045 Receive master distribution list mssags 050 Play messages
053 Keep messages 055 Discard messages
058 Play unplayed messages in FIFO order 059 Play unplayed messages first
066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx 070 User Options Menu
071 Record or change mailbox name 072 Record or change mailbox greeting
073 Enter and change mailbox passcode 074 Create or modify user distribution list
077 Change pager schedule 126 Make/Give to mailbox with empty GCOS
FCOS 3—Restricted
Restricted FCOS is used only in special applications because it has the least flexibility of all the
classes of service designed to receive messages.
While logged into a restricted mailbox, the user cannot

- Enter or change the name, greeting, or passcode
- Make, keep, answer, or give messages to other users; or
- Create or use distribution lists.
Only the attendant can record names, record greetings, and assign passcodes. For a hotel/motel
application using this type of mailbox, names and passcodes are usually entered by using a
special check-in mailbox (Default FCOS 4: see FCOS 4 - Check-In). Callers hear the greeting
“Please leave a message for <name>.”
Restricted mailboxes are also used by TAS (Telephone Answering Service) bureaus when (due
to disk storage considerations) they want to limit the number and size of names and greetings.
The TAS operator enters names, greetings, and passcodes by using a special line set up by the
system Message Attendant application. This setup is the only way that a greeting can be
recorded for a restricted mailbox. (Refer to Chapter 10, "Special TAS Considerations.")
When a user (or guest) logs in to a restricted mailbox

(a) The system announces the number of unplayed messages.
(b) The system automatically plays the first message
(the user is not required to press P).
(c) The user has the option to play the message again, keep the message, or discard the
message; press P (replay) K (keep) or D (discard).
(d) The next message plays automatically; play continues until all messages
have been played.
All messages are automatically kept, unless the guest presses D (discard messages) within a
few seconds.
005 Play Outside Caller Menu prompts 006 Rewind and fast-forward during playbck
008 Mailbox can be checked in/out 009 Automatic logout if no message/receipts
042 Not used 043 Receive Message of the day
044 Receive user distribution list messages 050 Play messages
052 Auto-play unplayed messages 053 Keep messages

054 Auto-keep messages 055 Discard messages

058 Play unplayed messages in FIFO order 059 Play unplayed messages first
066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx
FCOS 4—Check-In
The Check-in FCOS defines a special mailbox for hotel/motel use or TAS client maintenance.
This type of mailbox exists solely to provide names and passcodes for other mailboxes. When a
check-in mailbox is accessed, the system prompts for the number of the mailbox to check in, then
prompts the caller (usually a hotel/motel attendant) to record a name and enter a passcode for
the mailbox.
The desk clerk (or receptionist) uses a check-in mailbox to add the names and passcodes of new
guests or clients. Guests cannot change their own names and passcodes.
It is not necessary to create more than one check-in mailbox per system; a single check-in
mailbox can be accessed by several desk clerks at one time.
Guest mailboxes controlled by FCOS 4 must contain feature bit 008 (Mailbox can be checked
in/out). Guest mailboxes are, therefore, usually assigned default FCOS 2 (Full Guest) or default
FCOS 3 (Restricted).
001 Login to mailbox 004 Outside caller functions
005 Play Outside Caller Menu prompts 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx
072 Record or change mailbox greeting 090 Check in other mailboxes
FCOS 5—Check-Out
A check-out mailbox is the counterpart of the check-in mailbox. When an attendant calls a check-
out mailbox, the system prompts for the mailbox number to check out, requests the deletion of
any unplayed messages, and clears the mailbox of the guest's name, greeting, passcode, and
remaining messages. The mailbox is now ready to check in when a new occupant arrives.
You must create a check-out mailbox to use the hotel Check-in/Check-out feature of the system.
It is not necessary to create more than one check-out mailbox per system because a single
check-out mailbox can be accessed by several desk clerks at one time.
001 Login to mailbox 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx
072 Record or change mailbox greeting 091 Check out other mailboxes
FCOS 6—Greeting-Only
When an outside caller accesses a greeting-only mailbox, the system plays the greeting and
hangs up. Callers and other users cannot make messages for or give messages to a greeting-
only mailbox.
When a mailbox owner logs in to this type of mailbox, the system prompts, "Press U to change
user options, X to exit." The mailbox owner can change the mailbox name, greeting, and

passcode, but cannot make messages or create/use distribution lists.
Greeting-only mailboxes are useful for special applications, such as announcing shows and times
for movie houses and theatres.
EXAMPLE: Imagine a theater manager who wants callers to hear an announcement of show times. The
manager
- Creates a mailbox with FCOS 6,
- Calls the mailbox and logs in, and
- Records a greeting.
Many TAS bureaus rent DID (Direct Inward Dial) mailboxes for this type of application. (See
Chapter 10, "Special TAS Considerations.")
A greeting-only mailbox must have a greeting; otherwise, the system considers the mailbox
invalid. To log in to a greeting-only mailbox that does not have a greeting: press the * key (star)
on the telephone keypad, and enter the mailbox number. You can choose to remove feature bit
066 (Login during greeting in greet-only mbx) after you record a greeting for the mailbox.
003 Return to welcome prompt 060 Ignore DTMFs during greeting
062 Hang up immediately after greeting 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx
FCOS 7—Not Used
FCOS 8—Chain
Chain mailboxes play a greeting, then they route calls to the mailbox selected by the caller. The
chain mailbox cannot accept messages from users or callers. Assign the chain FCOS to a
mailbox, and record a greeting for the mailbox.
A chain mailbox prompts callers either to enter a mailbox number or to wait.

• If callers enter a mailbox number, the chain mailbox simply routes the call to the user’s
mailbox.
• If callers wait (do not immediately enter a mailbox number), the system transfers the call to
the attendant’s mailbox or to the attendant, depending on the configuration.
When a mailbox owner logs in to this type of mailbox, the system prompts, “Press U to change
user options, X to exit.” The mailbox owner can change the mailbox name, greeting, and
passcode; however, the owner cannot make messages, or create/use distribution lists.
Note: Chain mailbox is a default unless the FCOS has one of the following feature bits: the feature bit 062
(Hang up immediately after greeting); one of the receive message feature bits; or any of the tree,
rotational, or broadcast mailbox feature bits. The lack of these bits means that the system plays the
general greeting which asks the caller for a mailbox number.

003 Return to welcome prompt 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx

141 Define chain mailbox in Receptionist
NP Receptionist and the Chain FCOS

In NP Receptionist, the mailbox number is called an “extension number”. If the caller does not
enter an extension number, the system transfers the call to the attendant’s extension, if one is
defined. Otherwise, NP Receptionist transfers the call to the attendant’s mailbox.
If you include feature bit 141 (Define chain mailbox in Receptionist), a chain mailbox routes a call
to an extension, even if the chain mailbox does not have a greeting. In addition, NP Receptionist
can route a call from a chain mailbox to a tree mailbox, and vice-versa.
Chain mailboxes are useful for creating directories.
EXAMPLE: Company X uses extension 411 as the central directory assistance number. When callers dial
411, they reach a chain mailbox.
- The greeting instructs users to dial 1 and the first two letters of the last name of the
person they wish to call.
- The system then plays the prompt "Please enter another extension number."
- When a caller enters the number of one of these 100 series chain mailboxes, the system
plays a short list of employees and their extension numbers and repeats the prompt,
"Please enter another extension number."
- The caller can now enter the extension number of the person with whom he or she
wishes to speak.
FCOS 9—Time
The Time FCOS is a greeting-only mailbox that plays its greeting, announces the system time,
and asks for a mailbox number. The feature bit responsible for the time is 065 (Play system time
after greeting). If you want this functionality without having the time announced, you can make a
copy of this FCOS and omit feature bit 065.
Users can log in and change their user options (mailbox name, greeting, and passcode);
however, they cannot create or use distribution lists. No one can make messages for or give
messages to a time mailbox.
001 Login to mailbox 065 Play system time after greeting
066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx 070 User Options Menu
073 Enter and change mailbox passcode
FCOS 10 —VIP
The VIP FCOS provides advanced options for experienced users; it has more features than
FCOS 1 (Unlimited).
This FCOS contains: Multiple make/give, Attach original message to answer, and Message
addressing options (New message notification, Mark confidential, and Return receipt). FCOS 10
also includes the Outside Caller’s Menu.


007 Pause in record or play 015 Change wakeup options
018 Give and mark urgent 019 Answer and mark urgent
020 Make messages 021 Make and request receipt
022 Make to multiple destinations 023 Make and mark confidential
024 Give messages 025 Give and request receipt
026 Give to multiple destinations 027 Give and mark confidential
028 Give with comments 029 Answer messages
030 Answer and request receipt 031 Answer and mark confidential
032 Make to user distribution list 033 Give to user distribution list
034 Make to master distribution list 035 Give to master distribution list
036 Auto-receipt for user dist list msgs 038 Attach original message to answer
042 Not used 043 Receive message of the day
044 Receive user distribution list mssags 045 Receive master dist list messages
046 Announce receipt count at login 047 Notification prompt when new msg arrives
050 Play messages 053 Keep messages
059 Play unplayed messages first 061 Wait to record (timeout = # key)
066 Login during greetng in greet-only mbx 070 User Options Menu
075 Audit receipt message 076 Play urgent messages in FIFO order
077 Change pager schedule 078 Activate user tutorial
082 Soft play (interrupt) message count 083 Soft play (interrupt) most prompts
084 Give receipt message with comments 085 Give receipt message to multiple dests
086 Give receipt message 087 Make and mark urgent
088 Receive urgent messages 092 User will be in Dial-by-Name database
094 Change message delivery options 095 Mark message for future delivery
096 Make messages before keep/discard 098 Say “Press 0” to caller before beep
110 Make/give to telephone number 124 Change paging phone number
125 Clear user passcode 126 Make/give to mailbox with empty GCOS
FCOS 11 to 14—Reserved
FCOS 15 —Tree
The Tree FCOS is used to specify a tree mailbox; it causes a greeting to play; and it ends with a
prompt to enter a single digit to obtain more information. When the caller presses a digit, the call
is transferred to another (child) mailbox or to the operator. Refer to “Implement a Tree Mailbox”.
003 Return to welcome prompt 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mbx
074 Create or modify user distribution list 121 Define tree mailbox
FCOS 16—NP Forms

FCOS 16 is used in the NP Forms application to permit the information template function; it is
sometimes called “template” FCOS. NP Forms is an optional feature that provides “voice forms”
for this system.
A mailbox with this FCOS sequentially plays the greetings stored in its child mailboxes and

records a message after each greeting. A typical application might have a rotational mailbox (see
FCOS 17) with several child NP Forms mailboxes, all pointing to the same list of greeting-only
mailboxes.
Other relevant features you can use with the NP Forms application are:
• 139 (Template: assume last greeting mailbox FCOS)
• 149 (Log in to template through rotational mailbox)
007 Pause in record or play 020 Make messages
041 Receive messages from outside callers 043 Receive Message of the day
048 No auto-time stamp of unplayed mssags 049 No auto-time stamp of played messages
050 Play messages 052 Auto-play unplayed messages
053 Keep messages 054 Auto-keep messages
059 Play unplayed messages first 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mailbox
133 Don’t say: “You may start your msg now” 135 Define template mailbox (NP Forms)
136 Don’t say: “End of message” 138 Don’t say: “Message complete”
FCOS 17 —Rotational Mailboxes

Rotational mailboxes provide greetings that change. The greetings change either by time and
date (in a “period” rotational mailbox) or with every call (in an “index” rotational mailbox). Refer to
“Implement a Rotational Mailbox System” for more information.
Rotational mailboxes can be used with NP Forms applications (see FCOS 16).
003 Return to welcome prompt 066 Login during greeting in greet-only mailbox
068 Define rotational mailbox 070 User Options Menu
You can also use the following features in a rotational mailbox:
062 Hang up immediately after greeting
063 Call mailbox attendant after greeting
064 Call mailbox user extension after greeting
Suggested Additional FCOS

Here are some additional FCOS; these are not defaults. If required, you may create an FCOS,
give it an unused number, assign the feature bits specified, and assign mailboxes to the FCOS.
Any FCOS number from 18 through 20, or 25 through 640 is acceptable. See “Customizing Your
FCOS”.

Lodging
The Lodging FCOS is suitable for hotel/motel guests who do not need the features of the Full
Guest FCOS (see FCOS 2 - Full Guest).
001 Login to mailbox 041 Receive outside caller messages
002 Access Attendant 050 Play messages
004 Outside caller features 052 Play messages automatically
005 Outside Caller's Menu 053 Keep messages
006 Rewind..Fast Forward 055 Delete messages
008 Mailbox can be checked in/out 057 Played messages presented FIFO
009 Automatic logout 059 Play unplayed messages first
040 Receive user messages
Hotel Guest: Basic

This FCOS is designed for hotel or motel applications; it has fewer features than Restricted
FCOS (see FCOS 3 - Restricted). This FCOS provides basic play, keep, and discard capabilities
and offers user-friendly menus for guests. Mailboxes that use this FCOS do not require
passcodes, recorded names, or personal greetings. You can use this FCOS with PMS
integrations or with the NuPoint Voice application alone.
When using this FCOS, disable the passcode and user tutorial in the mailbox and enter 0000
(four zeros) at the Temporary Passcode prompt.
001 Login to mailbox 052 Play messages automatically
002 Access Attendant 053 Keep messages
006 Rewind..Fast Forward 055 Delete messages
008 Mailbox can be checked in/out 057 Play saved messages FIFO
009 Auto logout if no msgs/receipts 058 Play unplayed messages FIFO
040 Receive user messages 059 Play unplayed messages first
041 Receive outside caller msgs 122 Define broadcast mailbox
050 Play messages 123 Announce broadcast mailbox name
Broadcast
With the Broadcast FCOS, both system users and outside callers can send a single message to
multiple users.
FCOS Features to add:

Required Features Optional Features
001 Login to mailbox 040 Receive messages from other users
070 User Options Menu 041 Receive messages from outside callers
071 Record or change mailbox name 042 Not used
073 Enter and change passcode 043 Receive Message of the day
074 Create/Modify user distribution lists 044 Receive user distribution list messages
122 Define broadcast mailbox 045 Receive master distribution list mssags
123 Announce broadcast mailbox name
• Sender's name or mailbox number is announced to all recipients, unless feature bit 123
(Announce Broadcast Mailbox Name) is added.

• Feature bit 043 (Receive Message of the Day) is needed only when the broadcast mailbox is
also the user’s only mailbox.
Additional feature bits that you can use with broadcasting are not included in the Broadcast
FCOS definition, but you can choose to add or substitute them into your custom FCOS.
174 Define broadcast greeting mailbox
178 Define broadcast name mailbox
Administrator’s “No Login” Class of Service

This FCOS allows you to set up the administrator’s mailbox (record company greetings and
compile master distribution lists) and prevent unauthorized access.
The No Login FCOS is a copy of the VIP FCOS (see FCOS 10 - VIP) without FCOS bit 001
(Login to mailbox).
(a) Assign the VIP FCOS to the administrator’s mailbox.
(b) Record company greetings and compile master lists.
(c) Change the FCOS to No Login.
This FCOS prevents unauthorized use of the administrator’s mailbox. You can switch the
FCOS back to VIP whenever you need to reach the administrator’s mailbox again.
Multiple Make/Give
This FCOS contains all features of Unlimited FCOS (see FCOS 1 - Unlimited) except the Outside
Caller's Menu features (which allow an outside caller the chance to review comments, delete
comments, append additional comments, and send a message). Unlike the default Unlimited
FCOS, the user can make messages for, or give messages to, several mailboxes at one time.
FCOS features to add:

001 Login 044 Receive list message
006 Rewind..Fast Forward 045 Receive Master List message
007 Pause 050 Play message
020 Make messages for other users 051 Play private messages
022 Make for multiple mailboxes 053 Keep messages
024 Give messages to other users 055 Delete messages
026 Give to multiple mailboxes 058 Unplayed messages presented FIFO
029 Answer messages 059 Unplayed messages played first
032 Make to user distribution lists 070 User Options Menu
033 Give to user distribution lists 071 Record mailbox name
040 Receive user messages 072 Record mailbox greeting
041 Receive outside caller messages 073 Enter/Modify mailbox passcode
043 Receive the Message of the day 074 Create user distribution lists
Multiple + Answer With Original Message

This FCOS contains the feature bits of the Multiple Make/Give FCOS. In addition, the original

message is always sent when the user replies (answers a message).
FCOS features to add:

001 Login 044 Receive list message
006 Rewind..Fast Forward 045 Receive Master List message
007 Pause 050 Play message
020 Make messages for other users 051 Play private messages
022 Make for multiple mailboxes 053 Keep messages
024 Give messages to other users 055 Delete messages
026 Give to multiple mailboxes 058 Unplayed messages presented FIFO
029 Answer messages 059 Unplayed messages played first
032 Make to user distribution lists 070 User Options Menu
033 Give to user distribution lists 071 Record mailbox name
038 Answer/Attach original message 072 Record mailbox greeting
040 Receive user messages 073 Enter/Modify mailbox passcode
041 Receive outside caller messages 074 Create user distribution lists
043 Receive the Message of the day
Bulletin Board
This class of service defines a mailbox that plays a greeting and asks for single-digit input to
direct the user to one mailbox in a series of mailboxes ("child mailboxes"). Child mailboxes are
defined in distribution list 001 of the bulletin board mailbox.
EXAMPLE: The mailbox greeting says, "Welcome to Widgit Builders; press 1 for Customer Service, 2 for
Sales, 3 for the Credit Department."
The Customer Service department mailbox number is 245;

the Sales Department mailbox is 268; and
the Credit Department mailbox is 295.
This means that distribution list 001 of the bulletin board mailbox consists of mailbox numbers
245, 268, and 295.
Distribution list mailbox numbers are automatically put in ascending order. Bulletin board
mailboxes assign keys in the same order. Users must be careful to compose a greeting that
accurately reflects this key assignment.
EXAMPLE: When the telephone numbers in the above example are changed, and the Customer Service
Department mailbox number is 268, while the Sales Department mailbox number is 245; the
greeting must be changed to state "Welcome to Widgit Builders; press 1 for Sales, 2 for
Customer Service, 3 for the Credit Department."
When a mailbox is dropped from a distribution list, key assignments are shifted to accommodate
the remaining mailboxes' new positions within that distribution list.
Bulletin board child mailboxes can be any other type of mailbox, including other bulletin board
mailboxes. If, at the end of the sequence, messages are taken, assign an FCOS (such as
Restricted) to the mailboxes in distribution list 001 of the last bulletin board mailbox.
FCOS Features to add:

001 Login 073 User can enter/change passcode
044 Receive user list message 074 Create user distribution lists
070 User Options Menu 121 Tree
072 Record mailbox greeting

Customizing Your FCOS

This system offers various ways to customize your FCOS. You can
• Renumber one of the default FCOS
When the FCOS are already combined, and the FCOS has a number, when you create or
modify a mailbox, you only need to renumber the appropriate default FCOS and assign it the
desired mailboxes.
• Create new FCOS
This option gives the maximum flexibility when customizing call processing; it is the most
complex method. Be aware that not all feature bits are compatible. Refer to the following
section, “Understanding FCOS Features”. (For details on incompatibilities, see Chapter 7 of
Reference and Configuration.)
• Modify a copy of an FCOS
To use this option, make a copy of an existing FCOS for a basis and add or delete any
desired feature bits. Give the modified copy a new name and a new FCOS number.
• Modify FCOS, including default FCOS
Using this method, choose the default FCOS to modify and add or delete the desired feature
bits. Rename the modified default, if desired.
When you modify an FCOS already assigned to a mailbox, all mailboxes with that FCOS
behave according to the new definition. For this reason, it is preferable to create a new FCOS
to give users different sets of feature bits, rather than modify default FCOS.
Understanding FCOS Features

To understand FCOS and their feature bits, read the descriptions on the previous pages. Keep
the following interactions in mind:
• LCOS that you assign can affect the function of an FCOS feature.
EXAMPLE: If you give a mailbox the ability to receive user messages (feature bit 040), but you assign an
LCOS with a User Message Length limit of 0 seconds, the mailbox will be unable to store an
unplayed (or played) user message.
• Interaction between mailboxes is limited by the GCOS that you assign to each mailbox when
it is created and by the FCOS assigned to other mailboxes within this GCOS.
Be aware that certain options interact within and between each class of service; some
options require the presence of specific options, and some combinations are not compatible.
EXAMPLE: If an FCOS allows a user to make private messages (feature bit 023), other users within the
same GCOS must be able to receive messages from other users (feature bit 040) and to play
confidential messages (feature bit 051); otherwise, the make private message feature is
ineffective.
Chapter 7 in Reference and Configuration provides specific conditions and interactions for feature
bits descriptions.

Completing the FCOS Worksheet

When you are ready to customize an FCOS, use the FCOS and feature bits descriptions in this
chapter (and Chapter 7, Reference and Configuration) to complete the FCOS Worksheet. Blank
worksheets are available in the Reference and Configuration volume.
Complete one worksheet for each FCOS you design. It is a good idea to keep completed
worksheets for future reference.
Accessing the FCOS Menu

The Features Class of Service Menu is accessed through the console Main Menu.
1. Enter S for System Maintenance from the console Main Menu.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
(F) Floppy Backup
(R) Reconfiguration
(S) System Shutdown
(T) Module Status
(U) System Verify
(V) Event Recorder
(W) Network Menu
(X) Exit
2. Enter R to access the system reconfiguration program.

The System Configuration menu is displayed.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(A) Restore COS
(B) Backup COS
(C) Configure MWI Suppression
(F) Feature COS
(G) Group COS
(L) Limits COS
(M) Restriction COS
(N) Network COS
(T) Tenant COS
(P) Phoneline Exceptions
(R) Reconfigure System
(O) NP View Administration
(X) Exit
3. Enter F to display the FCOS Menu.

All FCOS parameters are set from this menu.
FEATURE CLASS OF SERVICE MENU

(C) Current FCOS [1]
(A) Add Features
(D) Delete Features
(N) Name FCOS [Unlimited]
(K) Copy FCOS
(U) Use Template FCOS
(S) Show FCOS
(R) Report FCOS
(H) Help FCOS
(Q) Quit--Forget Changes
(X) Exit--Save Changes
Creating New FCOS

1. Complete an FCOS Worksheet (see Completing the FCOS Worksheet). Use this worksheet
to make entries in this procedure.
2. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in the section "Accessing the FCOS Menu". All FCOS parameters
are set from this menu.
Note: You can quit at any point before you exit the FCOS menu. Quitting discards all new entries and
leaves settings as they were. Enter Q to quit and forget changes; enter Y to confirm yes.
Add new FCOS to the Configuration File as follows:
3. Enter C and assign a number to the FCOS that you are building. (Valid numbers are 18-20
and 25-640.)
4. Enter N to name the FCOS (maximum 15 characters).
When an existing FCOS is similar, copy it and add or delete the bits as required.
5. Enter A to add feature bits:

Type the one- to three-digit numbers of the feature bits. You do not need to enter leading
zeros.
Up to 128 FCOS feature bits may be added in one operation.
Valid feature bit entries include:

- Single bit
- Range of bits (for example: 202-208)
- Series of bits separated by commas (for example: 39,40,202,208)
- Mixed formats (for example: 208,1-7,50,55,6)
Note: Do not enter spaces after commas, and do not end the entry with a comma.
Press <Enter>.
6. Enter S to compare entries with your worksheet.

The system prompts you to enter the number of the FCOS to show.
7. Type the number of the FCOS that you just built.
A list of all feature bits of this FCOS is displayed; ensure that the list is correct.
Enter D to delete any unwanted features. Make any necessary changes.

8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to build additional FCOS.
9. Enter X to save the FCOS on the hard disk. Changes are not effective until you enter X.
Modifying FCOS (Including Default FCOS)

You can modify an existing FCOS if it does not meet all of your requirements. All FCOS are
modified from the FCOS Menu.
1. Choose the FCOS to modify.

Complete an FCOS Worksheet (see Completing the FCOS Worksheet) to make entries in
this procedure.
2. Follow Steps 1 through 3 under "Accessing the FCOS Menu".
Note: You can quit at any point before you exit the FCOS menu. Quitting discards all new entries and
leaves settings as they were. Enter Q to quit and forget changes; enter Y to confirm yes.
3. Enter C and the number of the FCOS to modify.

4. Enter N to change the name of the FCOS to reflect its new function when desired (maximum
15 characters).
5. Enter A to add features to the FCOS.
Enter D to delete features from the FCOS.
Type the one- to three-digit numbers of the feature bits (separate bits with commas) or enter
a range of bits. You do not need to enter leading zeros (for example: 40-45).
Press <Enter>.
6. Enter S to compare entries with your worksheet.

Type the number of the FCOS that you just modified.
A list of all feature bits of this FCOS is displayed. Be sure the list is correct.
Enter D to Delete any unwanted features. Make any necessary changes.

7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 to modify additional FCOS.
8. Select X to save the changes on the hard disk. Modifications are not effective until you enter
X.
Note: If you modify an FCOS already assigned to a mailbox, all mailboxes with that FCOS behave
according to the new definition of that FCOS and not the original definition. Therefore, you
should create new FCOS to give users different sets of feature bits, rather than modify default FCOS
(see the procedure for Creating New FCOS.

Implement a Tree Mailbox

A tree mailbox plays a greeting and ends with a prompt to enter a single digit to obtain more
information. When the caller presses a digit, the call is transferred to another (child) mailbox or to
the operator. A tree mailbox is sometimes called a "bulletin board" mailbox. See “FCOS 15 —
Tree” for feature bits.
Tree Mailbox Diagram

Before configuring a tree mailbox, complete a Mailbox Individual Worksheet and a Tree Mailbox
Worksheet. (Blank worksheets are available in the Reference and Configuration volume.) Include
the following information:
• Mailbox number
Enter the number of all mailboxes that are members of the tree mailbox’s distribution list 01
(child mailboxes) in the remaining boxes.
• FCOS
The FCOS assigned to a child mailbox determines its relationship to the tree mailbox and
also determines how it is used.
- Use one of the default FCOS or a customized FCOS that includes all applicable feature
bits. (“Step 2: Create ’Root’ Mailbox with FCOS 15”.)
• List
A tree mailbox must have distribution list 01, whose members are the mailboxes branched to
when a caller presses the associated digit.
• Members
Identify all child mailboxes as members of distribution list 01 in the tree mailbox.
• Greeting recorded
You must record a greeting in the tree mailbox to tell callers which digit to press for the
desired mailbox.
- Also record appropriate greetings or messages in the child mailboxes.
To Configure a Simple Tree Mailbox

Use the four steps, on the following pages, to help you to configure a simple tree mailbox.
Step 1: Complete Worksheets

Complete an Mailbox Individual Worksheet and a Tree Mailbox Worksheet (see Tree Mailbox
Diagram).
Step 2: Create ’Root’ Mailbox with FCOS 15

1. Enter M at the Main Menu to access the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
2. Identify the tree mailbox.
Note: This functionality changes with full-screen mailbox configuration. These instructions only apply for

the line (as opposed to screen) interface. For the full-screen interface, Create, Modify, and Delete all
use the same menu choice.
3. Enter C to create new mailboxes.

Enter M to modify mailboxes.
4. Enter the number of the new mailbox or the number of the mailbox to modify.
Press <Enter> to leave an existing parameter setting unchanged and move to the next
prompt.
5. Assign an FCOS designed for a tree mailbox:
- FCOS 15 (the default Tree FCOS).
- Customized FCOS containing all the features of a typical tree mailbox.
Include feature bit 120 (default to first child of mailbox) in the mailbox FCOS. This bit routes
callers, who do not enter a digit promptly after the Tree mailbox greeting, to the first child mailbox.
- To route these callers to the last child mailbox, include feature bit 186 (default to last
child of tree mailbox) in the mailbox FCOS.
6. Disable the tutorials in the child mailboxes. Change only the tutorial setting to NO; press
<Enter> to skip other fields.
Step 3: Create Distribution List 01

1. Create distribution list 01 (using the User Options Menu) for the Tree mailbox just configured.
2. Add the numbers of all child mailboxes to this list:
- To reach the lowest mailbox number, press 1 after the greeting.
- To reach the next mailbox number, press 2, and so on.
- Up to 190 child mailboxes can be added.
Step 4: Record Greetings in Tree and Child Mailboxes

1. Record an appropriate greeting in the tree mailbox and all child mailboxes to direct callers to
enter the appropriate numbers.
- If you delete a mailbox from the list or if you assign new numbers to mailboxes, you must
change the greeting to reflect the new order. In other words, you must re-assign list
entries because the system assigns caller input digits.
- If the appropriate FCOS bits are set (FCOS bits 120 or 186, see Step 2) and callers do
not enter a digit after listening to the greeting in a tree mailbox, the callers are routed to
the attendant’s mailbox or to the first or last child mailbox.
Nested Tree Mailbox

1. Select the child mailbox that you want to set up as a tree mailbox.
2. Configure the mailbox through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu (see “To Configure a Simple
Tree Mailbox”).
3. Create distribution list 1 for the newly configured nested tree mailbox by adding all child
mailboxes (related to the nested tree mailbox) as members.
4. Record a greeting in the nested tree mailbox.
Notes on Tree Mailboxes

• Child mailboxes in the distribution list of a tree mailbox can be tree (or any other type of)

mailboxes.
- Using NP Receptionist, feature bit 121 (Define tree mailbox) allows a child mailbox to
also be a tree mailbox.
- Feature bit 141 (Define chain in mailbox in NP Receptionist) allows a child mailbox to act
as a chain mailbox.
With these feature bits included in the mailbox’s FCOS, NP Receptionist can route a call from
a chain mailbox to a tree mailbox and vice-versa.
- Callers can bypass the single-digit tree options if they want to enter an extension number
instead.
EXAMPLE: By assigning an FCOS such as Unlimited or Restricted to a child mailbox, callers can leave
messages.
• The system processes the call according to the FCOS assigned to the selected child mailbox.
(“Step 2: Create ’Root’ Mailbox with FCOS 15”.)
- If feature bit 120 (Default to first child mailbox of tree mailbox) is included in the FCOS,
callers are routed to the first mailbox in the list.
- Feature bit 186 (default to last child mailbox of tree mailbox) works similarly by defaulting
to the last mailbox in the list.
When the tree mailbox is built in the administrator’s mailbox, the tree mailbox greeting
should:
- Instruct callers to press the # key (pound) to bypass the single-digit tree options.
- State that callers can reach an attendant by pressing 0 (zero).
Note: Be sure to tell callers to press the # key (pound) only while the greeting is playing; at any other time
during the call, if callers press #, they are disconnected.
EXAMPLE: SIMPLE TREE MAILBOX
A major hotel chain wants to route callers to a particular reservations desk. The tree mailbox
greeting says, "Welcome to Globe Hotels’ world-wide reservation service. Press 1 for hotels in
Canada and the US; press 2 for hotels in Mexico and South America; press 3 for hotels in
Europe."
To Implement this Arrangement

1. Plan for two series of numbers to be processed in the same order:
- Mailbox numbers for the three reservations desks.
- Single-digit numbers callers press on the telephone keypad to reach these mailboxes.
Table 3-2 illustrates the example.
Table 3-2
Department Mailbox Digit callers press to reach
# mailbox
Canada/US 104 1
Mexico/South America 106 2
Europe 107 3

2. Assign the Tree FCOS to a standard mailbox that acts as the tree mailbox.
“FCOS 15 —Tree”.
3. Create standard mailboxes for each reservation desk to act as child mailboxes.
4. Add the child mailbox number to distribution list 01 of the tree mailbox.
5. Record a greeting (similar to the one mentioned in this example) for the tree mailbox.
Implement a Rotational Mailbox System

A rotational mailbox plays its greeting, and then plays the greeting of a child (distribution list)
mailbox. The child mailbox greeting is selected by "rotating" through the mailboxes in distribution
list 01 of the rotational mailbox. Mailbox rotation can be triggered by one of two methods: index
or period.
Index Method
When you create distribution list 01 in the rotational mailbox:
• Index number 1 is automatically assigned to the lowest mailbox number in the list; index
number 2 to the next highest number, and so on.
• Every time the rotational mailbox is called, the system plays the rotational mailbox greeting
and plays the greeting of the mailbox that matches the current index.
- After this greeting plays, the counter increments by one.
• The next time that the rotational mailbox is accessed, the system plays its greeting and the
greeting of the mailbox that matches the new index.
• When the greeting of the last mailbox in distribution list 01 plays, the system rotates back to
the first mailbox on the list, resets the index to 1, and begins the cycle again.
- Default index is 1 (that is, the cycle begins with the lowest mailbox on the list). You may
set the index to a higher number if you want the cycle to begin with a different mailbox.
Period Method
The greeting of the first mailbox in distribution list 01 plays for the specified period, and then the
second mailbox greeting plays for the specified period.
A start date and start time for the cycle must be set. After all mailboxes in the distribution list are
accessed for the specified period, the system resets the start date and time to the date and time
of the last call. Then the cycle begins again, with the greeting of the first mailbox in the list.
Prepare the Mailboxes

In this application you are working with a rotational mailbox and a child (distribution list) mailbox.
The following table summarizes the steps to prepare these mailboxes.
Rotational Mailbox Child Mailbox

1 Configure a rotational mailbox 1 Create the mailboxes
FCOS.
2 Create a mailbox with this FCOS. 2 Log in to the mailboxes, and record
suitable greetings.

3 Set the index or period.

4 Set up the distribution list.
(This step must be done after distribution
list mailboxes are created).
5 Log in to the mailbox and record a
greeting
Note: In practice, combine some of these steps for efficiency.
To Configure a Rotational Mailbox System

Steps 1 through 4 outline a general plan for setting up a rotational mailbox and its child
mailboxes.
Step 1: Create Mailboxes

1. Create one mailbox with the rotational mailbox FCOS that you configured.
2. Create as many child mailboxes as you need. Choose an FCOS
that suits the application.
EXAMPLES:
If you want the system to hang up after it plays the child mailbox greeting, assign a Greeting-only
FCOS to the mailboxes.
If you want each mailbox to provide an introductory announcement before connecting the caller
with an employee, give the child mailboxes an FCOS that includes feature bit 063 (Call mailbox
attendant after greeting) or feature bit 064 (Call mailbox's extension number after greeting). Be
sure to include the attendant's extension number in the appropriate field when creating the
mailbox.
Note: The rotational mailbox and all child mailboxes must be in the same GCOS.
Step 2: Set the Index or Period for the Rotational Mailbox

The index tells the system which mailbox in the distribution list should begin the cycle. The
system automatically rotates to the next mailbox in the list on each subsequent call.
The period defines how long to play the current child mailbox greeting before rotating to the next
greeting. If you specify a period, it will override the index.
To Set the Index

1. Enter R from the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
Mailbox number to be rotated:
2. Enter the number of the rotational mailbox.
The system prompts:
Period (hours):
3. Press <Enter>.

The system asks:

Index:
Note: To reset a period rotation to an index rotation, enter 0 (zero) for the period.
4. Press <Enter> if you want the rotation to begin with the lowest-numbered mailbox in the list.
Valid indexes depend on the number of mailboxes that you add to the distribution list.
The system prompts:

Set start date for mailbox.
5. Press <Enter> to return to the Maintenance Menu.
Enter X twice in quick succession to shut down the console.
To Set the Period

1. Enter R from the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
The system responds:
Mailbox number to be rotated:
2. Enter the number of the rotational mailbox.
The system prompts:
Period (hours):
3. Enter the number of hours that one child greeting will play before rotating
to the next greeting. Valid hours are 1 through 255.
Start date (MM-DD-YY):
4. Enter the month, day, and year when you want to start the cycle
(for example: 06-20-96).
The system asks:
Start time (HH:MM [am/pm]):
5. Enter the hour and minute when you want to start the cycle
(for example: 02:10 indicates 2:10 a.m.).
If you do not specify a.m. or p.m., a.m. is assumed.
6. Press <Enter> in response to the "Set start date for mailbox" prompt to return to the Mailbox
Maintenance Menu.
Enter X twice in quick succession to shut down the console.
Step 3: Prepare the Rotational Mailbox

1. Call the system and log in to the rotational mailbox.
2. Press U (the 8 key) for User Options.
3. Press L (the 5 key) to change a distribution list.
The system prompts:
Enter a distribution list number.
4. Enter 01.
5. Press A (the 2 key) then enter the number of a child mailbox.

6. Repeat Step 5 until all child mailboxes have been added to the list.
Press X (the 9 key) to save the changes.
8. Press G (the 4 key), then record a Greeting.
9. Press X (the 9 key) to save the changes.
Press X twice in quick succession to exit the mailbox and recycle to the system greeting.
Step 4: Prepare the Child Mailboxes

1. Log in to the first child mailbox.
3. Press G (the 4 key) and record a greeting.
4. Press X (the 9 key) to save the changes.
Enter X twice in quick succession to exit the mailbox and recycle to the system greeting.
5. Log in to the next child mailbox.

6. Repeat parts 2 through 5 until all mailboxes have suitable greetings.
Limits Class of Service

The Limits Class of Service (LCOS) consists of numerous limits parameters set to a value of your
choice. As the administrator, an LCOS is the best resource available to you to control the use of
disk storage.
The LCOS assigned to a mailbox’s configuration controls the time and storage parameters
associated with that mailbox. For example, the LCOS can control message-length and the total
number of messages stored in a mailbox. You can also modify an LCOS to specify alternate
language prompts.
Note: All languages other than English are optional features. If an additional language is desired, the
appropriate alternate-language prompts diskettes must be installed. For a list of available languages,
contact your authorized dealer. (“Selecting Alternate Language Prompts”.)
Accessing the LCOS Menu

The LCOS Menu is accessed from the console Main Menu:
1. Enter S for System Maintenance (from the console Main Menu, or from the maintenance
diskette menu).
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
(F) Floppy Backup


(R) Reconfiguration
(S) System Shutdown
(T) Module Status
(U) System Verify
(V) Event Recorder
(W) Network Menu
(X) Exit

(A) Restore COS
(B) Backup COS
(F) Feature COS
(G) Group COS
(L) Limits COS
(M) Restriction COS
(N) Network COS
(T) Tenant COS
(X) Exit
3. Enter L to access the LCOS Menu.
LCOS Parameters
LCOS 1 is pre-programmed; this default LCOS can be modified. Limits parameters that comprise
LCOS 1 are located in "Default LCOS Limits Parameters", Reference and Configuration.
Up to 640 LCOS can be configured in this system; each can have different limits for the following
parameters (in the Limits Parameters Menu):
• Mailbox greeting length

This parameter limits the length of the personal greetings that users can record for their
mailboxes. When the maximum greeting length is reached, the recording terminates, and the
system says, "Recording complete."
The range of limits is from 0 (no greeting allowed) to 60 minutes. The default LCOS value is 2
minutes.
• Name length
The mailbox name is announced any time that the user makes a message for, or gives a
message to, another user; it is also used by NP Receptionist for certain operations. Name
length can be from 0 (no name allowed) to 60 seconds: the default is 2 seconds. When the
maximum name length is reached, the recording terminates, and the system says,

"Recording complete."
• Message count
This parameter limits the maximum number of messages that can be present in a mailbox at
one time. The system issues a warning to the user to discard any unnecessary messages
when the mailbox is 95% full. This parameter allows an outside caller, or other user, to leave
a message when the number of messages in the mailbox equals the message count. The
message count limit can range from 0 (no messages allowed) to 73: the default LCOS value
is 73, and the absolute maximum number of messages per mailbox is 73.
Note: The FCOS allows users to record additional comments when they give messages and directs the
system to attach the original message with every answer. If there is a reply to the answer, then the
original message, the answer, and the reply to the answer may be sent. The external mailbox
counter (which tells the user how many messages are in the mailbox) counts the original message
and the attached replies as one message. The internal message counter (which is controlled by
the message count parameter) counts the message and each attached reply or comment as
separate messages.
• Messages per billing

Messages per billing limits the number of messages that a single mailbox can receive
between gathers (see Chapter 13, "Billing Reports). A limit between 1 and 9999, inclusive,
may be specified. The default value is "blank", meaning that an unlimited number of
messages may be received in a billing period. (The number of messages that can be stored
in a mailbox at one time, however, is limited by the "message count" value.)
This field is usually left blank in corporate installation sites because no billing (and therefore,
no gathering) is done. To erase a value and return the Messages per Billing count to
unlimited, enter . (a period).
• User message length
This parameter limits the length of a single message that a system user can record for this
mailbox when using the Make, Give, or Answer commands. The range of limits is from 0 (no
user messages allowed) to 60 minutes. The default LCOS has a user message length of 5
minutes. When the maximum user message length is reached, the system terminates
recording and says, "Recording complete".
• Caller message length

An "outside caller" dials the system number, enters a mailbox number, listens to the mailbox
greeting (or, in certain cases, to the prompt, "Please leave a message for <name>"), and
leaves a message. The caller message length limits the time that is allowed to record a single
message.
The range of limits is from 0 (no user messages allowed) to 60 minutes: the default LCOS
value is 5 minutes. When the maximum user message length is reached, the system
terminates recording and says, "Recording complete."
• Maximum login time

remain logged into his or her mailbox. When this time is reached, the system says, "I'm sorry,
you have reached the limit of your login session," and logs the user out immediately. The time
can be specified in minutes: the default value is "unlimited." The range of limits is from 0 to 50
minutes. To change an existing value back to the default, enter . (a period).
• Played message retention, Unplayed message retention, and Urgent message

retention
These parameters specify the minimum amount of time and limit the maximum amount of
time that a played, unplayed, or urgent message remains in a mailbox before it is deleted by
an automatic message purge.
An automatic message purge (auto purge) is a task that runs once every 24 hours at
12:00 midnight. It purges any messages at, or over, their message retention limits.
EXAMPLE: If the played message retention of an LCOS is 8 hours, a message created at 12:00 noon will
stay in the system for 12 hours after it plays. If the message plays at 10:00 p.m., it will stay in
the system for 26 hours because the message has not reached its message retention limit by
the first purge. These examples assume that a manual message purge is not performed
between automatic purges. (Chapter 14, "System Maintenance Procedures," discusses how to
perform a manual message purge.)
Played, unplayed, and urgent message retention limits can be set from 1 to 8760 hours (one
year). Enter . (a period) in either category to prevent messages from being deleted by an
auto purge.
• Maximum attachments per message

Parameters specify the maximum allowable number of attachments per message.
• Maximum attachments per network message

AMIS Analog Networking optional feature.
• Network queue message count

NP Net optional feature.
Additional limits parameters are located in the following menus: More Limits Parameters, Even
More Limits Parameters, Call Placement Limits, NuPoint Fax Limits, and Message Age Limits.
(Enter the appropriate letter from the Limits Class of Service Menu.)
Creating and Modifying LCOS

Use the LCOS Worksheet to plan the LCOS for your system. Follow the instructions in
“Configuring LCOS”, to add this information to the Configuration File. Refer to the Sample LCOS
Worksheet (Figure 8-1) in Reference and Configuration.
Configuring LCOS
The system configuration program contains the menus for building (or modifying) LCOS.
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in “Accessing the LCOS Menu”. All LCOS parameters are set from
this menu.
LIMITS CLASS OF SERVICE MENU
(C) Choose Limits COS to Modify = [1]
(N) Name Selected LCOS = [Default]
(K) Copy LCOS
(L) Set Limits for Selected LCOS
(M) Set More Limits for Selected LCOS
(E) Set Even More Limits for Selected LCOS

(O) Set Call Placement Limits for LCOS

(P) Set NuPoint Fax Limits for Selected LCOS
(D) Set Message Age Limits for Selected LCOS
(G) Set Language for Selected LCOS = [Default]
(S) Show LCOS States
(T) Show More LCOS States
(V) Show Even More LCOS States
(U) Show Call Placement SCOS States
(W) Show NuPoint Fax LCOS States
(Y) Show Message Age Limits for Selected LCOS
(Z) Show LCOS Languages
(Q) Quit -- Abort Changes
(X) Exit -- Save Changes
2. Enter C.
Enter an unused number between 1 and 640 (inclusive) to represent the LCOS to build.
or
Enter the number of an existing LCOS to modify.
3. Enter N.
Type a name to describe the LCOS (maximum 15 characters).
4. Enter L to set limits for selected LCOS.

The Limits Parameters Menu is presented.
LIMITS PARAMETERS MENU
(G) Greeting Length = [2.0]
(N) User Name Length = [2]
(M) Message Count - [73]
(B) Message per Billing = [0]
(L) User Message Length = [5.0]
(C) Caller Message Length = [5.0]
(T) Maximum Login Time = [0]
(W) Network Queue Message Count = [73]
(S) Maximum Attachments per Message = [72]
(I) Maximum Attachments per Network Message = [72]
(X) Exit
5. Select the letter that corresponds to the category to change. Additional limits parameters are
available (enter M from the LCOS Menu):
MORE LIMITS PARAMETERS MENU
(A) NP WakeUp - Phone Length = [7]
(B) Paging - Phone Length = [7]
(C) Message Delivery - Phone Length = [7]
(D) Future Delivery - Message Count = [99]
(E) Max Days - Future Delivery = [60]
(F) Max Family Member or Guest = [0]
(G) Message Waiting Indicator - Message Length= [0]

(H) Minimum Message Length = [0]

(I) Maximum Pages per Billing = [0]
(J) Maximum Wakeups per Billing = [0]
(X) Exit - to Main Menu
Enter the value from the LCOS Worksheet when prompted (see “Creating and Modifying
LCOS”).
6. When all changes are made, enter X to exit to the LCOS Menu.
7. Enter S/T/V to Show LCOS/More/Even More LCOS States.
Confirm that all LCOS limits values are entered correctly.
8. Enter X to save LCOS changes and exit to the System Configuration Menu.
You do not need to reboot the system for changes to take effect.
Selecting Alternate Language Prompts

The default language for all line groups is English. All languages other than English are optional
features. You can modify an LCOS to specify alternate language prompts.
Before you can specify an alternate language for either a line group or an LCOS, you must install
the alternate-language prompts diskettes. To select alternate language prompts, enter G from the
Limits Class of Service Menu.
If your server is running more than one language at the line group level (one per line group) and
you want to control the line groups that callers reach, specify a prompts language for each LCOS.
This process ensures that callers hear mailbox prompts in the correct language.
For a list of available languages, contact your authorized dealer.
Group Class of Service

The Group Class of Service (GCOS) provides a way to manage the mailboxes with which a
particular set of system users communicate.
A GCOS gives you a way to manage a large system with many mailbox owners. This capability is
useful in multiple-mailbox-owner situations. It is also useful at sites where users perform
classified work.
The GCOS is essential to the operation of this system. A GCOS must be included in every
mailbox configuration for the mailbox owner to send and receive messages. You can assign up to
32,267 GCOS.
Accessing the GCOS Menu

The GCOS Menu is accessed from the console Main Menu:

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE


(F) Floppy Backup
(R) Reconfiguration
(S) System Shutdown
(T) Module Status
(U) System Verify
(V) Event Recorder
(W) Network Menu
(X) Exit

(A) Restore COS
(B) Backup COS
(F) Feature COS
(G) Group COS
(L) Limits COS
(M) Restriction COS
(N) Network COS
(T) Tenant COS
(X) Exit
3. Enter G to display the GCOS Menu.

GROUP CLASS OF SERVICE MENU
(C) Current GCOS [1]
(A) Add group
(D) Delete group
(N) Name GCOS [Default GCOS 1]
(S) Show GCOS
Configuring GCOS
From the GCOS Menu, you can create new GCOS or modify existing ones.
There are two types of GCOS: bitmapped and affinity group. The two types work differently,

though you can mix both in one system. One major difference is that you must define a
bitmapped GCOS before assigning it to a mailbox configuration; you can assign an affinity group
GCOS without defining it.
Bitmapped GCOS
• Numbered 1 through 64.
• May be seen as a collection of groups. Each GCOS can include up to 128 groups. A group is
a number from 1 through 128 (sometimes called a "group bit").
- Two users can exchange messages if their bitmapped GCOS have any of the same
groups.
• Can have several, few, or no groups defined; such a range allows message exchanges from
simple to complex.
• Works well when the mailboxes in your system have different communication needs.
• More flexible and complex than affinity GCOS.
Affinity GCOS
• Numbered 65 through 32,267.
• Works well when mailboxes require communication within particular groups, but not across
groups.
- All mailboxes with the same affinity group GCOS can communicate with each other but
cannot communicate with anyone else.
- Affinity groups are never defined; you simply assign one to a mailbox.
• Easier to use than bitmapped GCOS.
Which Type of GCOS Do I Use?

When choosing GCOS, consider the following factors:
• To allow all mailboxes to exchange messages, assign the Default GCOS 1, which contains all
128 groups.
• Mailboxes with bitmapped GCOS and those with affinity group GCOS cannot interact.
If you assign GCOS 1 to one mailbox and GCOS 65 to another, these mailboxes cannot
exchange messages. If you mix the two types, one mailbox cannot communicate with
another.
• Every mailbox that shares the same group in a bitmapped GCOS or shares the same affinity
group GCOS can exchange messages (even if the shared group is in a different GCOS).
• Bitmapped GCOS are useful when you need to develop complex relationships.
• Although mailbox owners may be in the same Dial-by-Name database, they can only reach
others in the database who share the same GCOS group (in a bitmapped GCOS) or affinity
group.
Creating New GCOS

Follow these steps to add new GCOS to the Configuration File:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in “Accessing the GCOS Menu”. All GCOS Groups are set from this
menu.

GROUP CLASS OF SERVICE MENU

(C) Current GCOS [1]
(A) Add Group
(D) Delete Group
(N) Name GCOS [Default GCOS 1]
(S) Show GCOS
2. Enter C.
Assign a number to the GCOS to build.
(Valid numbers are 1 - 64 for bitmapped GCOS, 65 - 32,267 for affinity groups).
3. Enter N to name the GCOS (maximum 15 alphanumeric characters).

4. Enter A to add groups.
Type the group numbers, separated by commas, that comprise a bitmapped GCOS. (You do
not need to enter leading zeros.)
Press <Enter>.
Up to 128 GCOS groups may be added in one operation.
Note: An affinity group GCOS does not contain groups.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to build additional GCOS.

6. Enter X to save the GCOS on the hard disk.
Changes do not take effect until you enter X.
Modifying GCOS
If an existing GCOS does not meet all requirements, you can modify it from the GCOS Menu:
1. Enter C.
Enter the number of the GCOS to modify.

(1 - 64 for bitmapped GCOS, 65 - 32,267 for affinity groups.)
2. Enter N to change the name of the GCOS to reflect its new function, if desired (maximum 15
alphanumeric characters).
3. Enter A to add to the GCOS or
Enter D to delete from the GCOS.
Type the feature numbers, separated by commas, or enter a range
(for example: 40-45). You do not need to enter leading zeros.
Press <Enter>.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to modify additional GCOS.
5. Enter X to save the changes to the hard disk.
Modifications are not effective until you enter X.

Enabling One-Way Communication

You are encouraged to create GCOS 2, but you are not encouraged to define any groups. This
"empty" GCOS is useful for restricting the capabilities of a mailbox and for enabling one-way
communication.
Owners of mailboxes with GCOS 2 assigned cannot exchange messages with any other users in
the system. You can prevent contact between users; however, you can permit receipt of certain
messages. For example, you should notify users before a system shutdown.
To enable one-way communication, an originating mailbox must have an FCOS that allows it to
make messages and allows the mailbox owner to make or give (messages) to a mailbox with an
empty GCOS. The feature bits required are:
020 Make messages
126 Make/give to mailbox with empty GCOS
The receiving mailbox must have an FCOS that allows it to receive messages from other users
(feature bit 040). Not only do these features enable a user to make a message for a mailbox with
the empty GCOS, but they enable the user to give messages from other users to the mailbox with
the empty GCOS.
Network Class of Service

The Network Class of Service (NCOS) controls users’ network access. NCOS settings control
whether a mailbox owner can send, give, or answer messages over the network. NCOS is part of
the NP Net Digital Network optional feature; NP Net provides twelve NCOS features. You can
combine features to create an NCOS that provides network privileges for a specific user group.
You can configure up to 64 NCOS.
For details on NP Net and NCOS, refer to the Networking volume.
Accessing the NCOS Menu and Configuring NCOS

2. Enter R to access the System Configuration Menu.
3. Enter N to display the NCOS Menu.
NETWORK CLASS OF SERVICE MENU
(C) Current NCOS [1]
(A) Add Features
(D) Delete Features
(N) Name NCOS [Default]
(S) Show NCOS
(R) Report NCOS
(H) Help NCOS
4. Select the desired option by entering the corresponding letter; complete procedures the same

as for FCOS (see Creating New FCOS).
Restriction Class of Service

The Restriction Class of Service (RCOS) is an element of NPA/NXX call screening that restricts
mailbox outdials to certain area codes or prefixes within an area code. One RCOS is assigned to
each mailbox.
Accessing the RCOS Menu and Configuring RCOS

2. Enter R to access the System Configuration Menu.
3. Enter M to display the RCOS Menu.
RESTRICTION CLASS OF SERVICE MENU
(D) Define System Wide Parameters
(P) Show System Wide Parameters
(A) Select RCOS = [1]
(M) Modify Selected RCOS
(S) Show Selected RCOS
(R) Report Selected RCOS
(T) Report All RCOS
(B) Delete Selected RCOS
4. Enter D to access the RCOS System Wide Parameters Menu.

RCOS SYSTEM WIDE PARAMETERS MENU
(A) Starting Digit Position of NPA = [0]
(B) Ending Digit Position of NPA = [0]
(C) Starting Digit Position of NXX = [0]
(D) Ending Digit Position of NXX = [0]
(X) Exit - to Previous Menu
Enter A to select the starting position of NPA (counting from 1).

For example: in the number (408) 428-3558, the NPA starting position is 10.
Enter B to select the ending position of NPA.

For example: in the number (408) 428-3795, the NPA ending position is 8.
Enter C to select the starting position of NXX.

For example: in the number (408) 428-3795, the NXX starting position is 7.
Enter D to select the ending position of NXX.

For example: in the number (408) 428-3795, the NXX ending position is 5.

Tenant Class of Service

The Tenant Class of Service (TCOS) is used with the ESMDI "Multi-Tenant" application to govern
mailbox interaction between user communities. Refer to MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER Non-
Mitel Integrations.
Accessing the TCOS Menu and Configuring TCOS

2. Enter R to access the System Configuration menu.
3. Enter T to display the TCOS Menu.
TENANT GROUP CLASS OF SERVICE MENU
(C) Current TCOS [1]
(A) Add Group
(D) Delete Group
(N) Name TCOS [Default TCOS 1]
(S) Show TCOS
4. Select the desired option by entering the corresponding letter; complete procedures in the
same way as for FCOS (see Creating New FCOS).
To add a group, enter A.
Valid entries include:
a = all
e = even
o = odd
l = lower half (1 - 28)
u = upper half (29 - 55)
first-last (for example: 1 - 5)
individual numbers, separated by commas (for example: 1,5,27)
individual numbers
Message Waiting Types

The mailbox message waiting type tells the system what equipment, if any, is available to notify a
mailbox owner of unplayed messages.
Note: The MITEL SX-200® DIGITAL PABX and SX-2000® PABX use message waiting types 0, 3, 5, and
7.
Default Message Waiting Types

0: None
No message notification is available.

1: Not available
The mailbox does not have any message notification capabilities.
2: AC message lamp
The system is equipped with an AC Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) system. The system
prompts for the address of the user's AC message waiting lamp unit, which is set with the
thumbwheel switches on the message light box.
• An AC MWI address includes (a) a house code, which may be any letter from A through P,
and (b) a unit code, which may be any number from 1 through 16.
EXAMPLE: A1, D5, P16. (Address P1 is reserved for troubleshooting and diagnostics, and it must not be
assigned to a mailbox.)
See “AC Message Waiting Lamp Address Codes”.
• After the address is entered, the system prompts for the number of the AC controller.
The controller number is either 1 or 2, depending on the controller unit shipped with the AC
message lights system. The controller number is displayed in the system Configuration
Report.
3: DTMF-to-PBX
The system sends DTMF signals over the telephone lines to control PBX message waiting
indicators. This method is compatible only with certain PBXs.
For this protocol to be used, the technician must program codes to control lights and to
configure a line group with at least one port dedicated as a message lights outdialer.
4: Fixed RS-232 (and Hitachi DX)

This message waiting type is a general purpose protocol that allows the system to control MWI by
communicating with the PBX through the serial port.
All RS-232 protocols send out codes to tell the PBX when to turn message lights on and off.
This option can only be used with PBXs that understand the Fixed RS-232 pre-programmed
codes.
The Hitachi DX pre-programmed RS-232 message waiting indicator interface is an optional

feature. Contact your authorized dealer for information.
5: Pager
This message waiting type is used to activate a radio pager, or to provide message delivery,
when a message is left in a mailbox. The Pager application must be configured for the system to
support pagers and/or message delivery.
Mailbox programming for this message waiting type is complex. Refer to Chapter 5, "Pagers
and Message Delivery," for information on adding a pager or programming message delivery
for a mailbox.
6: SL-1
This message waiting type is used when the SL-1/IVMS application is configured on the system,

or when the SL-1 background terminal facility (X37 release 3) message waiting protocol is used
to interface the system with an SL-1 PBX that is not using IVMS software.
Note: This option is superseded in SL-1 software. Unresolved conflicts can occur with some new features.
7: Programmable RS-232
The system sends signals through one of its serial (RS-232) ports to control PBX message
waiting lights by using a protocol programmed by the technician during system configuration.
8: Tip & Ring RS-232

The system sends signals over the telephone lines either to a Tip and Ring Message Waiting
Notification Controller (TRNC), which controls message waiting indicators at users’ workstations,
or to a dispatch indicator board, used for automated dispatch applications.
When the message waiting type is selected (during mailbox creation or modification), the system
issues a prompt that lets you specify the chassis number (the number of the TRNC unit to
which the user’s telephone line is connected) and a prompt that lets you specify the line number
(the exact position where the line is attached to that chassis). More than one TRNC unit can be
connected to the system. The technician makes a list of the users’ stations and their
corresponding addresses.
9: Centrex RS-232
The system communicates with Centrex over a serial interface to control message notification.
Typically, the notification is a stutter dial tone. The system activates available MWI.
10: Intecom RS-232

The system sends signals to an Intecom IBX over an RS-232 interface to control message
notification. Typically, the notification is an announcement when the user goes offhook. The
system also activates MWI.
11: NEC RS-232

The system sends signals to a NEC 2400 MMG over an RS-232 interface to activate the
message reminder feature. These signals are controlled by the NEC 2400 application, which
appears in your Configuration Report.
When this message waiting type is selected, the system prompts for the tenant number.
12: Video Dispatch

Video Dispatch is part of the Automated Dispatch Communication System. Video terminals
display the status of dispatch mailboxes. These displays are updated as messages are received,
played, and deleted. Special hardware and software must be acquired to run a Video Dispatch
system (contact your authorized dealer).
13: ITT RS-232

This custom-activation protocol is for the ITT 3100. The protocol operates over a serial interface
to control MWI.

14: TextMemo
15: AT&T System 75
This pre-programmed RS-232 MWI interface is an optional feature. Contact your authorized
dealer for information.
16: HIS PMS

This pre-programmed RS-232 MWI interface is an optional feature. Contact your authorized
dealer for information.
17: Unified Integrations

18: ROLM
19: SL-1 Message Waiting
20: Hitachi PMS
This pre-programmed RS-232 MWI interface is an optional feature. Refer to MITEL NUPOINT
MESSENGER, Non-Mitel Integrations.
21: SL-1 Enhanced Meridian

This pre-programmed RS-232 MWI interface is an optional feature. Refer to MITEL NUPOINT
MESSENGER, Non-Mitel Integrations.
22: Fujitsu 960

23: SMS-MWI
NP Receptionist Treatment Types
What Is a Treatment Type?

Treatment types tell NP Receptionist how the user wants calls handled under different situations.
Different treatment types can be specified for day and night answering. Any available treatment
type may be chosen for either time period.
Individual treatment types belong to one of two categories: extension or trunk. The appropriate
treatment type depends on the extension number of the mailbox.
• Extension Treatment Types are assigned to mailboxes when the mailbox’s extension
number is expected to be answered by a person (rather than a machine). Extension
treatment types tell NP Receptionist whether or not to screen calls. They specify the actions
to be taken when
- the extension rings, but there is no answer.
- the extension is busy.
- a screened call is rejected by the called party.
• Trunk Treatment Types are usually assigned to mailboxes that outdial to numbers that are
not answered by a person (for example, non-dial 1 long distance services). There is less
flexibility in how calls are processed. When the number is dialed, NP Receptionist

- receives a response indicating that the connect criteria have been met; or
- considers the call a failure, and follows the specified failure treatment.
You must determine the appropriate treatment type (extension or trunk) for the mailbox and
choose, from that category, the day and night treatment types that best meet the user’s needs.
Extension Treatment Types

Extension treatment types consist of the following elements; all choices are determined by user
preferences. Refer to “NP Receptionist Treatments Report”.
Call Screening Is/Is Not in Effect

When call screening is in effect, NP Receptionist (a) asks the name of every caller and puts the
caller on hold, (b) calls the desired extension, (c) announces the name of the caller, and (d) gives
the called party the opportunity to accept or reject the call.
System users can press the * key (star) and their mailbox numbers, when asked for their names;
the system announces the names recorded in the mailboxes. If a message is left, it is made from
the caller’s mailbox (which enables the called party to answer it by pressing A while logged into
his own mailbox).
RNA (Ring/No Answer) Treatment

The RNA treatment tells NP Receptionist what to do when an extension rings but no one answers
it. The treatment options are described in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 RNA Treatment Options
A Caller is transferred to the attendant’s extension number stored in the mailbox

data file. If no attendant’s extension number has been specified, caller is
transferred to the Console Attendant.
M Caller is prompted to leave a message in the called party’s mailbox.
R The redial menu that is selected under "Redial Menu to Use" (Table 3-3) is
played, and NP Receptionist follows the caller’s instructions.
Busy Treatment
The busy treatment tells NP Receptionist what to do with incoming calls when the extension is
busy. Choices are the same as the RNA treatment (see Table 3-3).
Reject Treatment
The reject treatment tells NP Receptionist what to do with screened calls that are rejected by the
called party. Choices are the same as the RNA treatment (see Table 3-3).
Redial Menu to Use

When R (redial) is selected as the treatment for any of the failure conditions (RNA, Busy, or
Rejected), "Redial Menu to Use" selects the redial menu to play and the associated action to
perform. The menus are named for the action taken if the caller does not do anything. Choices
are R (retry), M (message), A (assistance), and D (disconnect); the default value is M. The text of

each menu is given in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 Redial Menu Options
R Press zero for assistance;

Press "*" to hold for <called party’s name>;
Enter another extension number; or
Wait to leave a message.
M Enter another extension number;
Press zero to return to the attendant; or
Wait to leave a message.
A Press "*" to leave a message;
Enter another extension number; or
Wait for assistance.
D Press "*" to leave a message;
Press zero to return to the attendant; or
Enter another extension number.
(Receptionist hangs up after three tries.)
Authorized Period(s)
Access to a mailbox (and to its associated extension number) may be restricted to daytime hours
or night/weekend hours only by using the authorized period. Callers who try to access a number
at a time that is not within the authorized period hear the message, "I’m sorry, that number is not
available for access at this time."
Authorization Codes
When a treatment type contains an authorization code, all callers must enter the code before NP
Receptionist allows access to any extension or trunk with this treatment type. An authorization
code is used under special circumstances (for example, to restrict access to a modem or to a
WATS line).
Default Treatment Types

Ten treatment types are pre-programmed in the NP Receptionist configuration. These are
extension treatment types that do not require authorization codes and do not specify authorized
times. The default features are shown in Table 3-5.
No trunk treatment types are pre-programmed into the default configuration because they tend to
be site-specific. These treatment types can be modified by the system technician.
Table 3-5 Default Treatment Types

Treatment Ring/No Answer Extension is Busy Call is Refused Call
Type Screening?
1 Play Redial Menu D Play Redial Menu D Play Redial Menu D Yes
2 Play Redial Menu D Play Redial Menu D Not Applicable No
3 Play Redial Menu A Play Redial Menu A Play Redial Menu A Yes
4 Play Redial Menu M Play Redial Menu M Play Redial Menu M Yes
5 Prompt caller to Prompt caller to Not Applicable No
leave a message leave a message

6 Prompt caller to Prompt caller to Prompt caller to Yes

leave a message leave a message leave a message
7 Prompt caller to Play Redial Menu R Prompt caller to Yes
leave a message leave a message
8 Play Redial Menu R Play Redial Menu R Prompt caller to Yes
leave a message
9 Play Redial Menu R Play Redial Menu R Not Applicable No
10 Transfer caller to Transfer caller to Transfer caller to Yes
assistance number assistance number assistance number
Selecting a Treatment Type for a Mailbox

You can ask all users to choose from the pre-programmed default treatment types (see Table 3-
3), or you can assign special treatment types that you or the technician create for your system.
Run a Receptionist Treatment Types Report to display the features of the treatment types on your
system (“NP Receptionist Treatments Report”).
Trunk Treatment Types

The technician programs two features: the connect criteria and the failure treatment. These
features are unique to trunk treatment. Default trunk treatment types do not exist.
Connect Criteria
Connect criteria are the conditions when a trunk call is considered to successfully connect with
the called party. The default value is C (cut through), which means that all trunk calls outdialed
are considered successful. Other choices are T (the call is successful if it is answered by a
computer tone or a dial tone) and R (the system knows that the trunk call has gone through if the
receiving telephone rings). When you enter a trunk number in the extension number field, ensure
that you know what conditions are necessary for connection.
Failure Treatment
The failure treatment tells NP Receptionist what to do with a trunk call if the connect criteria are
not met. The user is given the choices listed in Table 3-3.
Programming NP Receptionist to Dial an Outside Mailbox Extension Number

The "mailbox extension number" does not have to be a PBX extension number. Specific mailbox
programming in NP Receptionist is used to allow callers to reach an outside number when they
input an extension number.
EXAMPLE: A mailbox can be created to outdial to a WATS line.

- Users who make long distance calls can access NP Receptionist and input the number of
the mailbox.
- NP Receptionist automatically dials the number and connects the user to the WATS line.
This programming offers the caller the convenience of dialing a shorter number. Additionally,
this technique gives the administrator the opportunity to choose treatment types that restrict
access to the WATS line by requiring an authorization code and/or requiring calls to be made

during an authorized time period. (“NP Receptionist Treatment Types”.)
When you want NP Receptionist to dial an outside number, you must program the system to
duplicate the steps that a caller uses to dial that number. Enter certain codes in the mailbox
extension number field. (“Step 1: Formulate a Coding String”.)
EXAMPLE: Characters such as T (wait for dial tone) must be included in the extension number dial string
and in the number itself.
A maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the mailbox’s extension number

field. If your dial string exceeds this number, you must use one of the extension pre-dial indexes
that are programmed by the technician during configuration. (You may use these indexes even
when the number does not exceed 15 characters.)
When you want NP Receptionist to outdial a number (other than a simple extension) when a
mailbox is accessed, use the following procedure to program the number into the mailbox.
Step 1: Formulate a Coding String

The easiest way to formulate a coding string that directs NP Receptionist to outdial a number is to
manually place a call to this number and note what steps were taken. Use codes from the
following list to describe your actions:
0-9,#,* Send out these DTMF tones (just as though they are being dialed from a
standard touch-tone telephone)
A-D Outdial these fourth column DTMF tones (keys are found on special
telephones)
T Go offhook (equivalent to lifting the receiver on a standard telephone) and
wait for a dial tone
( Send the digits that follow as pulses (10 pps)
) Stop pulsing digits; resume sending digits as DTMF tones
+ Pause for one second
G Greet - wait for a person or pager to answer
F Switchhook flash and wait for dial tone
S Switchhook flash (no wait required)
EXAMPLE A:
Company A has an account with a long-distance carrier that employees must use when placing
long-distance calls. To outdial to this service, the administrator is instructed to set up a mailbox
for each department. (Each department has a separate mailbox to enable billing counters to keep
track of long-distance use by department.)
To program the mailbox extension number, the administrator places a call and notes the steps:
To access the long distance carrier, the administrator (1) lifts the receiver and listens for a
dial tone, (2) dials 9 to get an outside line, (3) listens for a second dial tone, (4) dials the long-
distance carrier number:1-408-5556783, (5) waits for a computer tone greeting, then (6) dials the
company account number: 25439.
The system follows this procedure with one exception: the "clicks and pops" of particularly noisy
switching equipment may be mistaken for a greeting. Since you have no control over the

telephone company’s switching equipment, it is best to give the telephone connection a second or
two to "settle" before giving the instruction to listen for a greeting. The coding for placing this call
is:
T Wait for dial tone
9 Tell the PBX that you want an outside line
T Wait for a dial tone, to confirm that you have the outside line
14085556 Dial the long distance company’s number
783
++ Wait two seconds for the line to settle
G Listen for a computer tone
25439 Dial Company A’s account number
Thus, the coding string for outdialing this number is T9T14085556783++G25439.
Step 2: Choose a Mailbox Extension Pre-Dial Index

When the technician configures the system, the pre-extension dial strings may be programmed.
Each of these is represented by a number—the pre-dial index—to simplify programming for the
administrator.
To obtain a printout of pre-dial indexes and their dial strings, enter "?" (to request help) in
response to the "Mailbox’s extension pre-dial index" prompt. The available indexes, dial strings,
and pre-dial string descriptions are provided, as in the following display for Example A:
Index Pre-dial Strings Description

1 T9T Outside line
2 T9T14085556783 Non-"Dial 1" Account
Choose a mailbox’s extension pre-dial index that represents the coding string for the first part of
the number to outdial, or enter "n" for none. In Example A, choose Index 2.
Step 3: Enter the Mailbox Extension Number

The mailbox extension number consists of the balance of the dial string. Referring to Example A,
Index 2 directs NP Receptionist to outdial "T9T14085556783." The balance of the string,
"++G25439," must be entered as the mailbox’s extension number.
Note: The system prompts for the mailbox’s extension number and for the pre-dial index even though the
string represented by the pre-dial index is outdialed first.
Hidden (’Blind’) Mailbox Extension Number Programming

Dial strings to transfer to the mailbox extension number are contained in the pre-DN and post-DN
dial strings that are programmed into the configuration by the technician.
NP Receptionist programming adds certain characters to the end of the mailbox extension
number. These "hidden" characters depend on the mailbox’s treatment type:
• If the mailbox has an extension treatment type, NP Receptionist automatically appends a G

(wait for a person or computer tone greeting) unless you insert an H (hang up) at the end of

the dial string.

• If the mailbox has a trunk treatment type, the hidden character depends on the connect
criteria chosen:
- If the connect criteria is "Tone," a T (wait for dial tone) is appended.
- If the connect criteria is "Ring," a special character that tells NP Receptionist to wait for a
single ring is appended.
- If the connect criteria is "Cut through," NP Receptionist checks whether the last character
in the mailbox extension number is an H.
If it is not, NP Receptionist automatically hangs up after it outdials the dial string.
Programming an Outside Attendant’s Extension Number

This procedure is used to program an attendant’s extension number outside of the PBX network.
Step 1: Formulate a Coding String

When the attendant’s extension number exceeds 15 digits, you must formulate a coding string
that directs the system to dial the number. The coding string must simulate the steps that a caller
takes to place the call by using special characters to simulate certain actions. The following codes
are allowed:
0-9,#,* Send out these DTMF tones (just as though they are being dialed from
a standard touch-tone telephone)
A-D Outdial these fourth column DTMF tones (keys are found on special
telephones)
T Go offhook (equivalent to lifting the receiver on a standard telephone)
and wait for a dial tone
( Send the digits that follow as pulses (10 pps)
) Stop pulsing digits; resume sending digits as DTMF tones
F Switchhook flash and wait for dial tone
S Switchhook flash (no wait required)
EXAMPLE B:
Company B is a large corporation with central assistance number 1-408-555-9867. To keep track
of system use, the company issues department and personal account numbers to all employees.
To get assistance, this mailbox user must (1) lift the receiver and listen for a dial tone, (2) dial
9 to get an outside number, (3) listen for a dial tone to confirm that an outside line has been
reached, (4) dial the main number, (5) wait for another dial tone, and (6) dial the department
account number (0678787) and his or her personal account number (693201).
To duplicate and code this process, perform the following procedure:

T Wait for a dial tone, to confirm that you have the outside line
14085559867 Dial the toll number
T Listen for a dial tone

0678587693201 Dial the account numbers
Note: NP Receptionist always appends a G (wait for a greeting) to the end of the attendant’s extension
number. To make NP Receptionist perform a blind transfer (in other words, transfer the call by
putting the called party on hold, dialing the number, and hanging up), put an H at the end of the dial
string. (“Hidden (’Blind’) Mailbox Extension Number Programming”.)
Step 2: Choose an Attendant Pre-Dial Index

Your system may be configured with pre-extension dial strings. To obtain a printout of pre-dial
indexes and their dial stings, enter "?" (to request help) in response to the "Attendant’s extension
pre-dial index" prompt. The available indexes, dial strings, and pre-dial string descriptions are
provided, as in the following display for Example B:
Index Pre-dial Strings Description
1 T9T Outside line
2 T9T23759 Non-"Dial 1" Account
3 T9T14085559867 Central Assistance
Choose an attendant’s pre-dial index that represents the coding string for the first part of the
number to outdial. In Example B, choose Index 3 because it will direct the system to outdial all
numbers except the department account and employee’s personal account numbers.
Step 3: Enter the Attendant Extension Number

The balance of the dial string must be entered as the attendant’s extension number. Using
Example B, the department account number and user’s personal number are not covered by the
pre-dial string. Thus, the user’s attendant extension number becomes 0678587693201.
Attendant’s Dialing Sequence

NP Receptionist
When a caller requests assistance, NP Receptionist
• Executes the pre-DN string programmed into the system configuration.
• Dials the string represented by the attendant’s extension pre-dial index (if one was selected).
• Dials the attendant extension number.
• Executes the post-DN string.
If the attendant’s number is busy, the call is rejected. If the attendant does not answer, NP
Receptionist follows the RNA (RIng/No Answer), Rejected call, or Busy treatment dictated by
the original called party’s treatment type.
Applications Other Than NP Receptionist

When a caller requests assistance after leaving a message, or when a user presses 0 (zero)
while logged into his or her mailbox, the system
• Executes the attendant’s transfer string programmed into the system configuration.
• Dials the string represented by the attendant’s extension pre-dial index (if one was selected).

• Dials the attendant extension number.

• Hangs up (that is, the internal programming automatically appends an H to the end of the
attendant extension number).
4 Mailbox Maintenance
This chapter describes the administration functions available from the Mailbox Maintenance
Menu. To access this menu, enter M from the console Main Menu.
MAILBOX MAINTENANCE
(B) Mailbox Block Inquiry
(C) Create New Mailboxes
(D) Delete Mailboxes
(E) Mailbox Dump
(I) Inquire About Mailboxes
(K) Copy/Delete/Enable Mailbox Greetings
(L) List Maintenance
(M) Modify Mailboxes
(P) Set Passcode/Tutorial
(R) Rotational Mailboxes
(S) Search for Mailboxes
(W) Mailbox Disk Speech Usage
(X) Exit
Create Mailboxes
The most important responsibility of the administrator is to create and assign mailboxes which are
central to the voice messaging system. Complete the Mailbox Individual Worksheet and follow
Steps 1 through 3 to create new mailboxes. Blank worksheets are available in Reference and
Configuration.
To Create New Mailboxes

1. Enter C to create new mailboxes from the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
The system prompts:
Mailbox to create
2. Respond to each of the prompts outlined in the next section, "Required and Optional Mailbox
Information."
Press <Enter> after each entry.
Press <Enter> to leave an item blank.
Mailbox <number> created.
The mailbox setup is displayed for you to review and you are prompted:
Mailbox to create
3. Enter another number, or press <Enter> if you have completed creating mailboxes.
To create a range of mailboxes, see the instructions within each prompt outlined in the next

section, "Required and Optional Mailbox Information."
Required and Optional Mailbox Information

When you create a mailbox, you are actually building a data file on the hard disk. As a minimum,
the following five elements must be entered:
• Mailbox number; the default is 1.
• FCOS; the default is 1.
• LCOS; the default is 1.
• GCOS; the default is 1.
• Message waiting type #1.
The system allows mailboxes to store additional information to

• Provide call processing instructions for NP Receptionist automated attendant program.
• Allow mailbox users to have a personal attendant.
• Provide data for mailbox searches, for billing, and for video dispatch displays.
• Give users additional message waiting indicators.
1. Mailbox to Create (Mailbox Number)

All data in the mailbox file is referenced by the mailbox number. This number must conform to the
mailbox dialing plan of your system; otherwise the user will not be able to access the mailbox. For
an explanation, see “Dial Plan”. The dialing plan for your system may be found in the
Configuration Report.
When Creating a Range of Mailboxes

- Enter the first and last numbers in the series, separated by a hyphen
(for example: 222-314).
- Numbers must conform to your system's mailbox dialing plan.
2. Mailbox Name
The mailbox name may consist of up to 31 alphanumeric characters. This name is displayed any
time that mailbox information is requested. If you do not want to enter a mailbox name, press
<Enter>.
Suggestions for this field are

• User’s name, if mailboxes are held by individuals.
Note: You should maintain a uniform format for Dial-by-Name; for example, all uppercase (capital) letters.
• Mailbox functions, if the mailbox is dedicated to a specific purpose.

• Useful criterion for a mailbox search.

- Mailbox name is given to every mailbox in the range.
3. Department Code
The department code can be up to 10 alphanumeric characters. This field is intended to hold a
department name or similar designation.
• Use as a search criterion (for example, display all mailboxes that belong to Department 04A).
• Use for billing.
• Video Dispatch application can display department codes at the top of the screen.

- Department code is assigned to every mailbox in the range.
4. Access Code
The access code is a specific code that the caller must enter in order to leave a message. To
leave this entry blank (no access code), press <Enter>.

- Access code is assigned to every mailbox in the range.
5. Receptionist Day Treatment/Receptionist Night Treatment

Enter the number of the Receptionist treatment type that best matches the way that the mailbox
owner wants calls processed during regular working hours. Treatment types are described in
Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide".
Select "Mailbox only" treatment if

• Mailbox owner does not have a PBX extension.
• Mailbox owner wants all calls received during regular working hours to be transferred directly
to the mailbox.

- Receptionist treatment is assigned to every mailbox in the range.
6. Mailbox's Extension Number

The mailbox's extension number is the number that NP Receptionist calls during the day or night
if the mailbox has a Day/Night Treatment Type other than "Mailbox only".
• If the user's extension number is the same as the mailbox number, press <Enter>.
• Enter the user's PBX extension number if it is different from the mailbox number.
• If you want NP Receptionist to call a number outside the PBX network, refer to “Programming
NP Receptionist to Dial an Outside Mailbox Extension Number”.

- If you press <Enter>, NP Receptionist automatically assigns a matching mailbox

extension number to every mailbox in the range.
- If you enter a mailbox's extension number that differs from the first mailbox number in the
range, all mailboxes are given the same mailbox's extension number—the number that
you just entered.
7. Mailbox's Extension Pre-dial Index

The pre-dial index represents a dial string that is programmed by the system technician. This
entry is required only if the mailbox's extension number is long (as in the case when the mailbox's
extension number is actually an outside number).
• If the Mailbox's extension number is a PBX extension and/or no pre-dial index is needed,
enter <Enter>.
See “Pre-extension Dial Strings Report”.

- If you enter a pre-dial index, it is assigned to all mailboxes in the range.
Note: When mailbox programming is complex enough to require a pre-dial index, it is better to create the
mailboxes individually.
8. Attendant Extension Number

The Attendant extension number is called if users—who are logged in to their mailboxes—press 0
(zero) in response to the prompt: "Press P to play the current message, X to exit the system, zero
to return to the attendant."
• Mailbox FCOS must contain feature bit 002.
• If a personal attendant number is not defined, the PBX console attendant number is called (if
defined by the technician).
With NP Receptionist, the attendant extension number is also the personal assistance number for
callers to this mailbox. NP Receptionist calls this number
• Any time callers request (or wait for) assistance after they enter the user's extension number.
• If the user's (for example, Mary Smith) treatment type specifies call screening: NP
Receptionist announces to the attendant, "Hello, <John Jones> calling for <Mary Smith>."
• If the attendant extension number is not defined in the mailbox: NP Receptionist transfers
callers to the system attendant extension.
- If neither a personal attendant extension number nor a system attendant extension
number is defined, callers are transferred to the attendant’s mailbox and are prompted to
leave their names, numbers, and messages.

- The attendant's extension number (if any) that you assign to the first mailbox is given to
all others in the range.

9. Feature Class of Service (FCOS)

The FCOS controls mailbox user privileges and outside caller functions for the mailbox. Individual
privileges and restrictions are designated by numbers—feature bits. The FCOS are different
combinations of these feature bits. For example, a user’s ability to make, give, or answer
messages is controlled by the FCOS assigned.
To view the FCOS available on your system, run an FCOS Report. Chapter 3, "Mailbox
Reference Guide," describes FCOS and feature bits in detail and gives instructions for building
additional FCOS.

- The same FCOS are given to all mailboxes in the range.
10. Limits Class of Service (LCOS)

The LCOS imposes certain time limits on mailboxes. It can be a valuable tool for allocating disk
storage space and port use.
Each LCOS can set the maximum times allowed for recording mailbox greetings, user messages,
caller messages, and mailbox names; it can limit the amount of time a user remains logged in
during one session. The LCOS can specify the maximum time a played or unplayed message can
be stored in a mailbox before it is erased by the automatic purge. It can specify the maximum
number of messages that a user can accumulate in a mailbox. You can also modify an LCOS to
specify secondary language prompts.
To view the LCOS configured on your system, run an LCOS Report. Chapter 3, "Mailbox
Reference Guide," describes the LCOS parameters in detail and gives instructions for building
and modifying the LCOS.

- The same LCOS are given to all mailboxes in the range.
11. Group Class of Service (GCOS)

The GCOS is the group management resource that keeps track of large systems with many
groups.
Bitmapped GCOS, numbered 1 through 64, make up a collection of groups. Each GCOS consists
of 128 possible groups. Any or all of the 128 groups can be assigned or deleted from the GCOS.
Affinity group GCOS, numbered 65 through 32,267, work well when mailboxes require
communication within particular groups; they do not work across groups.
Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," discusses the GCOS in detail and provides information on
restrictions and interactions between mailboxes (and FCOS).

- The same GCOS are given to all mailboxes in the range.

12. Network Class of Service (NCOS)

The NCOS controls user’s network access. NCOS settings control whether a mailbox owner can
send, give, or answer messages over the network. You can configure up to 64 NCOS and
combine features to create NCOS that provide network privileges for specific user groups. NCOS
is part of the NP Net Digital Network optional feature.
Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," discusses NCOS and provides configuration instructions.

- The same NCOS are given to all mailboxes in the range.
13. Tenant Class of Service (TCOS)

The TCOS is used with the ESMDI "Multi-Tenant" application to manage mailbox interaction
between user communities.
Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," discusses TCOS and provides configuration instructions.

- The same TCOS are given to all mailboxes in the range.
14. Restriction Class of Service (RCOS)

The RCOS is an element of NPA/NXX call screening that restricts mailbox outdials to certain area
codes or prefixes within an area code. One RCOS is assigned to each mailbox.
Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," discusses RCOS and provides configuration instructions.

- The same RCOS are given to all mailboxes in the range.
15. Enter a Temporary Passcode

A temporary passcode provides security until the new user logs in (that is, when a new user
accesses the mailbox and enters a personal passcode).
• Default passcode length is 10 digits (this parameter may be changed by the technician who
programs your system).
• Once logged in, a tutorial instructs a new user to enter a personal passcode
and record greetings and names for mailboxes.
Chapter 2, "First Administration Session," gives instructions for running a Configuration
Report. This report shows the default passcode length.

- If you enter a temporary passcode, it is assigned to all mailboxes in the range.

16. Tutorial (Y/N)

You can choose to activate tutorials to guide users to enter personal passcodes and record
greetings and names for mailboxes.
17. Enter the Message Speech Quality (0, 18, 24, 32):
The default is 18.
18. Enter the Name and Greeting Speech Quality (0, 18, 24, 32)
The default is 18.
19. Enter Internal Outdial Index

The index number (0 to 15) that represents the access code for internal calls.
20. Enter Billed Outdial Index

The index number (0 to 15) that represents the access code for outdials to be charged to a billing
account.
21. Enter Unbilled Outdial Index

The index number (0 to 15) that represents the access code for outdials not charged to a billing
account.
22. Enter Billing Number

The number of the account (up to 24 digits) that outdials are billed to.
23. Enter Billing Dialing Order

The order in which the system processes the billing number and destination telephone number in
the outdial dial string. You select BN to require the billing number to be processed before the
destination telephone number, or NB to require the destination telephone number to be
processed before the billing number.
24. Message Waiting Type #1

The message waiting indicator type tells the system how to notify a user of unplayed messages in
the mailbox. The type selected depends on what is available on the system. The system supports
the following message waiting types:
0: None
1: Not available
2: AC msg lamp (system prompts for House Code and Unit Code)
3: DTMF to PBX
4: Fixed RS232

5: Pager (see Chapter 5, "Pagers and Message Delivery")

6: SL-1
7: Program RS232
8: T/R RS232 (system prompts for chassis number and line number)
9: Centrex RS232
10: Intecom RS232
11: NEC RS232 (system prompts for tenant number)
12: Video Dispatch (requires special hardware and software)
13: ITT RS232
14: TextMemo
15: AT&T System 75
16: HIS PMS
17: Unified Integrations
18: ROLM
19: Mitel
20: SL1 Msg Waiting
21: Hitachi PMS
22: SL1 Enhanced Meridian
23: Fujitsu 960
24: SMS-MWI
Message waiting indicator types are described in Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide".
Note: The MITEL SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and SX-2000 PABX use message waiting types 0, 3, 5, and 7.
The same message waiting type is assigned to all mailboxes in the range. However,
- If you choose message waiting type #2 (AC message indicators), the system
automatically assigns sequential message waiting light addresses to the mailboxes in the
range.
EXAMPLE: If you assign address D2 to the first mailbox in the range, the second mailbox is addressed D3,
the third D4, and so on.
- If you choose message waiting type #8 (Tip and Ring message lights), the system
automatically assigns sequential message waiting light addresses to the mailboxes in the
range.
EXAMPLE: If you assign the address "Chassis 2 Line 4" to the first mailbox in the range, the second
mailbox is addressed "Chassis 2 Line 5", the third "Chassis 2 Line 6", and so on.
- If you are assigning pagers and/or message delivery, create the mailboxes individually.
25. Pager Access Type (for MWI Type 5 Pager)

Enter a pager system between 0 (zero) and 15. You may also choose to use the billed index
where I, B, U, and N indicate the following:
I Internal outdial index
B Billed outdial index
U Non-billed outdial index
N Undefined index

For an example, refer to the index numbers chart.

Message waiting type #2 allows the system to notify a user of unplayed messages in two different
ways. For example, the system can activate a radio pager and update a video dispatch screen at
the same time.
All message waiting indicator types can be used as message waiting #2 indicators. You can have
up to four radio pagers per mailbox. (“Message Waiting Types”.)
Refer to Chapter 5, "Pagers and Message Delivery."

- The same message waiting type #2 (if any) is assigned to all mailboxes in the range.
- Message waiting type exceptions listed for message waiting type #1 apply to message
waiting type #2.

Choose 0, 9, or 17.
28. Turn Off Pager/Outdial Notification (for MWI Type 5 Pager)

Enter Y to turn off pager/outdial notification. Enter N or press <Enter> to leave notification on.
29. Fax Retrieval Pager Access Type

Enter a pager system between 0 (zero) and 15. You may also choose to use the billed index
where I, B, U, and N indicate the following:
I Internal outdial index
B Billed outdial index
U Non-billed outdial index
N Undefined index
For an example, refer to the index numbers chart.
30. Default Telephone Number for Fax Retrieval

Enter the number of the department or company fax machine to allow users to retrieve faxes from
a personal (default) fax number.
31. Call Placement Pager Access Type
Enter B for Billed Outdial Index.

32. Time Zone Offset

The offset (hours) between the time zone in which the mailbox owner is located and the time
zone in which the server is located.
33. Lists with Change Rights

The number(s) of distribution lists in the mailbox that the owner is allowed to change; the default
is ALL.
34. Lists with Review Rights

The number(s) of distribution lists in the mailbox that the owner is allowed to review; the default is
ALL.
Delete Mailboxes
The Delete command allows you delete a single mailbox or a range of mailboxes.
To Delete a Single Mailbox

1. Enter M from the Main Menu to access the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
2. Choose D to Delete.
3. Enter the number of the mailbox to delete.
The system displays the mailbox information and prompts you to confirm this delete.
4. Enter Y to delete the mailbox, or
Press <Enter> or enter N to leave the mailbox unchanged.
The system prompts:
Mailbox to delete
5. Enter another mailbox number to delete, or
Press <Enter> to return to the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
To Delete a Range of Mailboxes

2. Choose D to Delete.
3. Enter the first and last numbers of the mailboxes in the range to be deleted, separated by a
hyphen (for example: 101-203).
The system asks for confirmation:
Deleting mailboxes...
WARNING: If you really want to delete these mailboxes enter "delete".
4. Type delete (lowercase).
Delete (y/n) [N]:
5. Ensure that the mailbox numbers in the range are correct.
Enter Y to delete this range of mailboxes.

The system prompts:

Mailbox to delete:
6. Enter another mailbox number to delete, or
Modify Mailboxes
The Modify option allows you to change any parameters of an existing mailbox.
2. Enter M to Modify.
The system prompts:
Mailbox to Modify
3. Enter the mailbox number.
The system displays all existing mailbox information, and prompts you for changes.
4. Enter new values
Press <Enter> for any value you do not want to modify.
The system displays the new mailbox information and prompts:
Mailbox to Modify
5. Enter another mailbox number, or
Change/Reset Passcodes
You can set users’ passcodes to certain values, or clear them. This option is useful when mailbox
owners forget their passcodes.
2. Enter P to Set Passcode/Tutorial.
The system prompts:
Set a passcode for mailbox
3. Enter the desired mailbox number.
New passcode
4. Enter a new passcode, or
Press <Enter> to leave passcode unchanged, or

Enter 0 (zero) if you want to clear an existing passcode, or
Enter S to make passcode the same as the mailbox number, or
Enter R for a random generated number.
Choose a passcode with four to 10 digits (0 to 9).
The system asks:

Tutorial? (y/n)
5. Enter Y to enable the tutorial.

The first time that the system is accessed, it directs the new user to record a name and a
greeting for callers and to enter a passcode.
Passcode for mailbox <number> set. Tutorial enabled.
Enter N if the user has already set up the mailbox.

Passcode for mailbox <number> set. Tutorial cleared.
The system prompts:
Set a passcode for mailbox
6. Press <Enter> to return to the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
Detailed information on passcodes is available in Chapter 15, "System Security."
Tutorial Enable/Disable
The tutorial provides users with basic instructions on how to set up a new mailbox. It is
automatically enabled when a mailbox is created.
There are times when users may not want to hear the tutorial (for example, when setting up a
series of chain mailboxes for directory assistance).
• Use the procedure in “Change/Reset Passcodes” to enable or disable the tutorial.
Mailbox Search
The Search function lets you program the system to display information on all mailboxes that
match the mailbox parameters or a group of parameters that you select.
The available selection criteria include:

• FCOS
• LCOS
• GCOS
• NCOS
• Mailbox extension number
• Mailbox extension pre-dial index
• Department code
• Mailbox name
• Message waiting type
• Mailboxes without passcodes
• Attendant extension number
• Attendant extension pre-dial index
• Mailbox number or range of numbers

• Mailboxes with new user tutorial enabled
Any of these features may be specified as criteria for your search. The system can search the
mailbox data files of all mailboxes or a specified range of mailboxes.
The search begins when you enter S and press <Enter>. Each time the search criteria is
selected, the system displays the current selection. See “To Perform a Mailbox Search”.
EXAMPLE:
The following example is a search for all mailboxes in the Accounting Department; it has the
mailbox code 045 to match the department number.
• Find out what mailboxes, if any, are not passcode-protected.
Because all mailboxes on the system in the 600 to 900 range are utility mailboxes, you only
want to search the mailbox range 100 through 599.
To Perform a Mailbox Search

2. Select S to set the search pattern.
SEARCH PATTERN
(A) All Mailboxes
(B) Internal Outdial Index
(C) FCOS - Feature Class of Service
(E) Mailbox’s Extension
(F) Mailbox’s Extension Pre-dial Index
(G) GCOS - Group Class of Service
(H) Department Code
(I) Name
(J) Unbilled Outdial Index
(K) Billing Number
(L) LCOS - Limits Class of Service
(M) Message Waiting Type
(N) No Passcode
(O) Attendant Extension
(P) Attendant Pre-dial Index
(Q) NCOS - Network Class of Service
(R) Range of Mailboxes
(S) Search
(T) Tutorial Enabled
(U) TCOS - Tenant Class of Service
(V) Billed Outdial Dialing Order
(X) Exit
3. Enter H.
The system asks for the department code assigned to the mailbox.
4. Enter the department code (in this example: 045).
The system issues a display of search criteria.
5. Enter N for No passcode.

The system updates the display.

6. Enter R to choose a range of mailboxes to search.
Mailbox(es) to display (<CR> for all):
7. Enter the range of mailboxes (in this example: 100-599), or
Press <Enter> to search all mailboxes.
The system updates the display of search criteria.
8. Enter S to begin the search.
The information for all mailboxes in the range 100 to 599—which have a department code of
045 and which are not passcode protected—is displayed in the following format:
>>>ABC Corporation<<<
Mailbox Search Utility
Fri Jan 29, 1996 8:15 am
MAILBOX: 313
MSGS: 6 UNPLAYED: 0 URGENT: 0 RECEIPT: 0.4
LCOS: Default : 1 FCOS: VIP : 1
GCOS: 1 NCOS: Default : 1
BAD LOGS: 0 LAST LOG: 01/29/96 7:34 am MINS: 0
PASSWD: Y TUTOR: N DAY: M NIGHT: M
NAME: Allan Donald CODE:
EXTEN: INDEX: 0
ATTEN DN: INDEX: 0
TOTAL Mailboxes: 1 Messages: 6 Unplayed: 0 Urgent: 0 Minutes: 0.4

9. Enter X to exit to the Mailbox Maintenance Menu after the Search is complete.
Mailbox Data
Several reports are available to show the mailbox configuration data through the Reports Menu
and the Mailbox Maintenance Menu:
(a) The Mailbox Data Report is available through the Reports Menu and is keyed to the
mailboxes themselves.
It provides statistics for every mailbox on the system. To run the Mailbox Data Report and
interpret the results, follow the steps outlined on chapter 11.
(b) The reports available through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu are keyed to search criteria
that you specify. These reports allow you to obtain statistics on specific mailboxes.
These reports include the Mailbox Data Inquiry Report , the Mailbox Block Inquiry Report,
and the Mailbox Dump Report.
Inquire About Mailboxes

The Inquire About Mailboxes option asks the system to display mailbox information for a specified
mailbox number or for a range of mailbox numbers. This option produces the Mailbox Data

Inquiry Report.
The Mailbox Data Inquiry Report shows

• Message counts
• Class of service assignments
• Message waiting type
• Passcode status
• Login status
To Run the Mailbox Data Inquiry Report

2. Enter I to Inquire About Mailboxes.
3. Enter a mailbox number or range of numbers. Enter a range of numbers
in the format first-last (for example: 4000-4999).
The system displays a list of all mailboxes specified; the system shows message statistics,
classes of service, message waiting type, and login status of each mailbox.
4. Enter additional mailbox numbers, or press <Enter> to exit.
The system displays information in the following format:
Box Msgs Unp Urg Rec Mins FCOS LCOS GCOS NCOS MWI Pswd
501 2 1 0 0 1.3 1 1 13 1 Centrex RS 232 Y
502 2 1 0 0 9.7 1 1 12 1 Centrex RS 232 Y
503 11 10 1 0 28.2 2 1 1 1 Pager Y
504 0 1 0 0 0.0 7 1 1 1 Centrex RS Y (T)
232
Reading the Mailbox Data Inquiry Report

Columns of data in the Mailbox Data Report indicate the following information:
BoxMsgs The mailbox number.
Unp Total played, unplayed, and urgent messages in the mailbox.
Urg Unplayed messages.
Rec Urgent messages.
Mins Receipts (requested and forced).
FCOS LCOS Length of all messages (in tenths of a minute).
GCOS NCOS Classes of service assigned to the mailbox.
MWI Message waiting type assigned to the mailbox.
There is a temporary passcode for this mailbox, and the mailbox owner
Passwd
has not yet logged in.
The tutorial for a new mailbox owner has been activated.
T There is (or is not) a passcode for this mailbox, and the mailbox owner
Y/N has logged in.

Mailbox Block Inquiry

The Mailbox Block Inquiry option presents the Mailbox Blocked Report information (available
through the Billing Menu) in a "blocked" format—without titles or summaries. The data can be
redirected to a personal computer and manipulated by using a spreadsheet program for an
invoice or monthly statement.
To Run the Mailbox Block Inquiry Report

2. Enter B for Mailbox Block Inquiry.
The system prompts:
Mailbox to display:
3. Enter a mailbox number or range of numbers. Enter a range of numbers
in the format first-last (for example: 4000-4999).
The system displays an unformatted report of all billing statistics that have been
configured for each mailbox specified and the rate set for each statistic.
4. Enter additional mailbox numbers, or press <Enter> to exit.
Mailbox Dump
The Mailbox Dump option is a useful troubleshooting aid. It allows you to obtain a comprehensive
report on a specific mailbox.
The Mailbox Dump Report consists of four parts

(a) Login status
(b) Configuration
(c) Usage statistics (labelled "contents")
(d) Message queues
These entries show the number of messages free, played, unplayed, urgent, and undelivered; the
number of message receipts; and the number of future delivery messages.
To Run the Mailbox Dump Report

2. Enter E for Mailbox Dump.
The system prompts:
Mailbox #
The system prompts you to select the labeled report version:
(M) Mailbox, (D) Dump
4. Enter M for mailbox information in ASCII (text); or
Enter D for mailbox information in hexadecimal.
The system displays the login status, configuration, usage statistics, and message queue

statistics for the specified mailbox.
Note: The report can only be displayed on the maintenance console; it cannot be routed as output to an
output device (printer).
5. Enter another mailbox number or press <Enter> to exit.
5 Pagers and Message Delivery

The Pager and Message Delivery application supports two message waiting features: radio
pagers and message delivery.
Radio Pagers
The system can access the following types of radio pagers:
• Tone only: beeps when activated
• Tone and vibrate: allows a user to set pager to vibrate when beeping is undesirable
• Display: shows the telephone number where the paging party can be reached
• Voice: allows a calling party to leave a brief message
The system can activate the display of a display pager or issue a message for
a voice pager when the message is left in a mailbox.
Message Delivery
Message delivery provides message waiting indication by calling a user at a preconfigured
telephone number.
When the phone is answered,

the system says:
"Hello <name recorded in the mailbox>. You have <number> unplayed message(s)
in your mailbox. Please enter your passcode."
After a passcode is entered,
the system says:
"You have <number> unplayed message(s) in your mailbox.
Press P to play the current message."
The user is now logged in to the mailbox and can use any of the features (play, make, give,
and so on) available for the mailbox’s class of service.
The system prompts for the passcode once, then waits 30 seconds for a response.
If someone other than the user answers, and does not know the passcode, the system says:
"Call back when you can remember your passcode. Bye!" and hangs up.
The system counts this as a successful page. (“Successful versus Unsuccessful Pages”.)

Message delivery is particularly valuable for users who work off-site, and cannot use ordinary
message waiting indicators. Without message delivery, these users would have to call in several
times a day to receive messages.
Guidelines for Pager and Message Delivery Allocation

• At least one port is required to outdial pages; it must be dedicated exclusively to outdialing.
This means that fewer ports are available to accept incoming calls. If not enough ports are
reserved to handle the paging traffic, paging requests will queue, and users will not receive
message waiting notification in a timely manner.
• Certain additional types of message waiting indicators require the exclusive use of at least
one line card port.
Before assigning pagers or message delivery to mailboxes, it is important to analyze call-

traffic flow and to decide how much of the system you want to devote to paging.
• Each call to a radio pager ties up an outdialing port for less than one minute. Queuing only
becomes a problem in situations when several users have pagers.
• Message delivery requires more ports than paging because each port is tied up for the entire
time that the user is logged in.
If a user does more than simply play the unplayed message(s) that activated the message
delivery, the outdialing port can be in use for a considerable length of time.
• The installation site (as the calling party) is responsible for any charges that accrue when
paging or message delivery calls are made to numbers outside the PBX system.
Alternate Pager
Each mailbox can be programmed to contact up to three pagers (referred to as Pager 1, Pager 2,
and Pager 3).
• Pager 2 is an alternate for Pager 1.
The system pages the user at Pager 1 and Pager 3 first. When these calls are successful, the
system is complete. The system prompts for Pager 2 programming after all information is
entered for Pager 1.
• Pager 2 can also be used to assign a second frequency and/or interval to the same pager or
message delivery number.
The pager frequency is the maximum number of times that the system re-pages. The pager
interval is the maximum length of time that the system waits before re-paging when the
previous page was successful. The default pager interval is 30 minutes.
EXAMPLE: If a user has message delivery, and you want to page twice, five minutes apart,
then—if the message has not played—page three times, 30 minutes apart; assign
pagers as follows:
Pager 1: frequency of 2, interval of 5
Pager 2: frequency of 3, interval of 30

Message Waiting Indicator #2

Each mailbox can have a second message waiting indictor. Unlike an alternate pager, this
indicator is activated at the same time as message waiting indicator #1.
Successful versus Unsuccessful Pages
Successful Pages
If the pager call encounters speech or silence after outdialing or if the telephone rings when a
message delivery call is made, the system counts the page as "successful".
Successful pages are retried a maximum number of times (the pager frequency), for a specified
number of minutes apart (the pager interval). The pager frequency and interval are discussed in
“Alternate Pager”. Paging is discontinued when
• Frequency number is reached.
• User listens to all unplayed messages in the mailbox and logs out.
• User disables the paging.
Unsuccessful Pages
If a busy or reorder tone is encountered after dialing a pager call, the page is considered
"unsuccessful"; the system waits for the busy interval and attempts the page again.
When the system detects that an "illegal" dial string (that is, one that does not conform to system
programming rules) is outdialed, it considers the page successful. This notice prevents the
system from continually retrying the page.
However, if a dial string is programmed incorrectly (and cannot activate the pager), but the string
conforms to pager programming rules, the system continually retries the page. Therefore, it is
critical to test every pager immediately after programming is complete (“Step 7: Test the
Pager”).
Turning Paging and Message Delivery On and Off

Users can turn off paging or message delivery when they do not want to be "on call" so that the
pager port is not tied up by issuing unwanted pages. For any mailbox with Pager/Message
Delivery as a message waiting indicator, assign an FCOS that includes the feature bits
• 070 User Options Menu
• 077 Enable/Disable Pager
Unlimited, Full Guest and VIP default FCOS have these two feature bits. (See Chapter 3,
"Mailbox Reference Guide.")

To Disable and Enable Paging

The user performs the following steps to disable paging:
1. Log in to the mailbox, press U (the 8 key) for User Options.

The system prompts, "Press C to change call schedule options.
P to schedule paging.
E or D to enable or disable paging."
2. Press D (the 3 key) to disable paging.
The system confirms the choice: "Paging disabled."
When paging is disabled, and the user accesses the User Options menu, the system
prompts: "Press E to enable paging."
3. Press E (the 3 key) to enable paging.

The system confirms the choice: "Paging enabled."
Be sure to give these instructions to the user when you assign the mailbox.
Mailbox Programming for Pagers

Whether you are programming the system to outdial to a pager or to call a user to provide
message delivery, the principle is the same; you want the system to duplicate the steps to
activate the pager or to place the phone call. These steps must be programmed into the pager
outdial index (access code index) and pager number (“Step 3: Choose Pager System Outdial
Index and Pager Number”).
When you select Message Waiting Type 5 (Pager) while creating a mailbox, the system prompts
you for an outdial index, a pager number, a pager frequency, and a pager interval. You can
program up to three pagers (pagers 1, 2, and 3) per mailbox. Use the following procedure to
answer prompts.
Step 1: Determine the Activation Protocol

Manually activate the pager, or call the user who wants message delivery; as you do, carefully
note exactly what steps were necessary.
EXAMPLE: Many pagers require you to dial the telephone number of the pager company, listen for a
computer tone, then dial the code number of the pager. However, before dialling the pager
company telephone number, pick up the telephone receiver and listen for a dial-tone to be sure
that the telephone system is ready to accept the number.
The steps for successfully activating this pager are as follows:
1. Go offhook and listen for the dial tone.
2. Dial the pager company number.
3. Listen for the computer tone.
4. Dial the pager number.
Step 2: Formulate the Coding String

Translate the activation protocol into a coding string that the system understands. Use the
following codes to describe your actions:
0-9,#,* Send out these DTMF tones

(as if they are dialed from a standard touch-tone telephone)
A-D Outdial these fourth column DTMF tones (keys on special phones)
T Go offhook and wait for a dial tone
() Digits enclosed should be dial pulsed (all other tones are DTMF)
F Switch hook flash and wait for dial tone
S Switch hook flash (no wait required)
V Play the first unplayed message
(and update the mailbox to count it as played)
Special Programming Notes

Note: 1. After the last character is outdialed, the system goes on-hook ("hangs up") automatically,
except when message delivery is specified.
2. When a mailbox is programmed for message delivery, the system automatically waits for a
greeting. (If a G is erroneously programmed at the end of the dial string, the system ignores it.)
A "V" anywhere in the dial string causes the system to play the first unplayed message only. If
there is more than one message in the mailbox, the user will probably be paged again. The next
unplayed message will play because each unplayed message generates its own paging request.
4. When the system is programmed to outdial a telephone number to the outside network, and the
number is followed by a G (wait for person or pager to answer), the "clicks" and "pops" of
particularly noisy switching equipment may be misinterpreted as a greeting. To avoid any
misunderstanding, dial the telephone number, then count the number of seconds it takes for the
receiving telephone to ring or the pager to answer.
- If the call is made to a pager, insert the appropriate number of plus signs (+) between the
number and the G. For example, if the dial string is "T9T5551212G," and it took five seconds to
answer, change the string to "T9T5551212+++++G."
- Since Message Delivery always assumes a G at the end of the dial string, insert the appropriate
number of plus signs (+) at the end of the pager number.
Step 3: Choose Pager System Outdial Index and Pager Number

The coding string you must formulate is divided into two parts:
(a) Pager system access code, represented by the outdial index (access code index)
(b) Pager Number
The system prompts for the outdial index and the pager number when you create the
mailbox.
The choice of outdial index and pager number is flexible. For example, if the coding string you
formulate is T9T4085551212++G1234, you can choose:
• Outdial Index 0 and Pager Number 4085551212++G1234; or
• Outdial Index 2 and Pager Number 5551212++G1234; or

• Outdial Index 5 (without a dial string), and put the entire coding string into the Pager Number
(where outdial indexes match those shown in the table that follows).
Limitations:
The only limitations are on the size of each dial string;
• Pager numbers are limited to 24 characters.
• Access codes are limited to 30 characters.
The outdial index serves two purposes.

(a) It tells the system what characters to outdial before dialing the Pager Number.
(b) It assigns a pager system to the mailbox.
Thus, if you want to enter the entire outdial string into the Pager Number field, you must
choose an outdial index to assign a pager system. If you do not select an outdial index for a
mailbox, the system cannot issue a page when a message is left in that mailbox.
You can obtain a printout of pager systems, outdial indexes, and dial strings by running the Pager
Access Codes Report from the Reports Menu. To obtain help when you create a mailbox, enter
"?" when the system prompts for the outdial index. The system displays the available indexes,
dial strings, and pager system names, as displayed in the following example:
Enter one of the following index numbers:

Index Dial String Paging System Name
0 ... T9T Outside line
1 ... T9T415 415 Area Code
2 ... T9T408 408 Area Code
3 ... T9T916325 PAGER 916-325
4 ... T Internal Pager
5 ... Empty
6 ... <No Name>
7 ... <No Name>
8 ... <No Name>
9 ... <No Name>
10 ... <No Name>
11 ... <No Name>
12 ... <No Name>
13 ... <No Name>
14 ... <No Name>
15 ... <No Name>
Note: In this display, Pager Systems 6 through 15 do not have names. Up to 16 different page systems are

allowed; only 5 were necessary for this installation. Pager System 5 (Empty) is set to use with
Pagers that have entire dial strings in the Pager Number.
To add a pager that must outdial more than 24 characters (that is, when the coding string is too
long to fit into the Pager Number field) when an appropriate outdial index does not exist, the
system technician must configure a new pager system before the pager can be added.
Step 4: Choose the Pager Frequency

The pager frequency is the maximum number of times that the system attempts to notify the user
of an unplayed message if each page is successful. The default pager frequency is three.
A page is considered successful if the system does not encounter a busy signal or a reorder tone
after the pager/message delivery call is made. After a successful page, the system waits the
number of minutes specified for the pager interval (see "Step 5: Choose the Pager Interval"); then
(if the message in the mailbox remains unplayed), the system repeats the page. For a review see
Successful versus Unsuccessful Pages.
If the page was unsuccessful, the system continuously retries the number until the party is
successfully paged. For this reason, it is important that you make a test call to verify the pager
programming (see "Step 7: Test the Pager").
Step 5: Choose the Pager Interval

The pager interval is the number of minutes that the system waits before re-paging when the
previous page was successful. The default pager interval is 30 minutes.
Step 6: Message Delivery

When messages are left in a user’s mailbox, message delivery calls the user at a specified
telephone number, indicates the number of messages, and asks whether the user wants to check
them.
Step 7: Test the Pager

It is important to test a pager immediately after it is added to a mailbox. An error in programming
can cause every page to fail. To test a pager or message delivery, leave a message in the
mailbox and contact the user to be sure the page was successful.
Radio pager - ensure that the pager is activated
Display pager - the user must check the display digits to ensure that
they are accurate
Voice pager - the user must ensure that the first (unplayed) message
plays at the appropriate time
Message delivery - the system must call the appropriate telephone number
• When the call is answered, the system should prompt:

"Hello, <name>. You have <number> unplayed messages(s) in your mailbox. Please enter
your passcode."
- If the first part of the greeting is cut off, add more plus signs (+) at the end of the pager

number.
- If the user answers, and there is a long silence before the system plays the greeting,
decrease the number of plus signs (+) at the end of the pager number.
See Special Programming Note 4, of “Step 2: Formulate the Coding String”.
Pager Programming Examples
Example 1: Tone or Tone and Vibrate Pagers
To page John Smith manually, you must lift the telephone receiver, wait for a dial tone; dial 9 to
get an outside line; listen for another dial tone; dial (408) 555-9876; allow two seconds for the line
to settle; listen for computer tone; then dial 1234. This makes John’s pager beep or vibrate. The
code for these actions is:
T9 Wait for dial toneTell the PBX that you want an outside line
T Wait for dial tone to confirm that you have the outside line
4085559876 Call the pager company’s number
++ Wait for the line to settle
G Wait for computer tone
1234 Dial the number of the individual pager
If you do not reach John on the first page, he wants you to try to reach him every 10 minutes, for
a maximum of four attempts.
To add a pager to John’s mailbox:
Pager System 2 is programmed to outdial T9T408.
1. Enter 2 for the "Pager access code index" (outdial index).

2. Formulate the coding string.
3. Enter 5559876++G1234 for the "Pager number".
4. Enter 4 for the "Pager frequency".
5. Enter 10 for the "Pager Interval".
6. Because this pager call is being made to a pager and not to a telephone, you do not want
message delivery.
Enter N.
7. John does not need an additional pager; press <Enter>.
The system prompts: "Message delivery? y/n."
Enter N.
Example 2: DID Display Pager
Mary Jones has a DID display pager. To access this pager manually, you must lift the telephone
receiver; wait for a dial tone; dial 9 to get an outside line; listen for a dial tone; dial (916) 325-
9116; wait four seconds for the call to go through; wait for a computer tone; dial the display data,
237-6644; and press the # key (pound) to tell the pager that all the display data has been

entered. This process activates the pager. The code for these actions is:
T9T9163259116++++G2376644#
Mary wants you to make three attempts to reach her, and each attempt should be 30 minutes
apart (the default values for pager frequency and pager interval).
To add one pager to Mary’s system:

Respond to the prompts as follows:
• Pager access code index

(outdial index): 3
• Pager Number: 9116++++G2376644#
• Pager Frequency: <Enter> or 3
• Pager Interval: <Enter> or 30
• Message Delivery: N
To add additional pagers to Mary’s system:

The system prompts for additional pagers:
If you answer Y, the system responds:
Pager access code index: <CR>

Pager Number: <CR>
Pager Frequency: <CR>
Pager Interval: <CR>
Message Delivery: N
Example 3: Voice Pager

Joe Stockman works in a warehouse located in the back of the building. Because the only
telephone is located in the warehouse office, Joe was given a voice pager, which allows
employees to notify him when they want to pick up stock. To access this pager manually, you
must lift the telephone receiver; wait for a dial tone; dial extension 6457; wait for Joe to answer;
give him your order; and hang up. The code for these actions is:
T6457GV
Joe is so efficient that he only needs to be paged once per message.
To add Joe’s pager to the system:


(outdial index): 4
• Pager Number: 6457GV
• Pager Frequency: 1
• Pager Interval: 0

• Message Delivery: N
To add additional pagers to Joe’s system:

The system prompts for additional pagers:
Pager access code index: <CR>

Pager Number: <CR>
Pager Frequency: <CR>
Pager Interval: <CR>
Message Delivery: N
Example 4: Message Delivery

Sarah Bell is a contractor who works off-site. When she is not working at her office, she wants to
be reached at her home. Her office phone number is (415) 555-6836, and her home number is
(408) 555-0921. Sarah wants calls directed to her office number attempted three times, with calls
10 minutes apart. She wants calls directed to her home number attempted two times, with calls
30 minutes apart. When test calls were made, it took five seconds after dialing was completed for
her office phone to ring; it took three seconds for her home phone to ring. The dial string to call
Sarah’s office is:
T Wait for dial tone to confirm that you have the outside line
4155556836 Dial the office number
+++++ Wait 5 seconds for the connection to be completed
Similarly, the dial string to call her home is: T9T4085550921+++
To add message delivery to Sarah’s mailbox:


(outdial index): 1
• Pager Number: 5556836+++++
• Pager Frequency: <Enter> or 3
• Pager Interval: 10
• Message Delivery: Y
To add pagers to Sarah’s mailbox:

The MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER system prompts for additional pagers.
Pager access code index: 2

Pager Number: 5556836+++++
Pager Frequency: <CR> (or 3)
Pager Interval: 10
Message Delivery: Y

Testing
After the technician installs phone lines, and after you create mailboxes for paging or message
delivery, you must test each mailbox. Testing is essential to ensure that the pager ports dial valid
paging codes.
Testing Radio Pagers

Use the Lights Test option, available from the console System Maintenance Menu, to test each
mailbox equipped with a radio pager.
To start the test:

1. Enter S to access the System Maintenance Menu, from the Main Menu.
2. Enter O to access the Additional Options Menu.
3. Enter L for Lights test.
Mailbox to light (1 -99999999999):
For each mailbox:

4. Place a butt set on the outdial telephone line in MONITOR position.
5. Enter the mailbox number on the console.
Light off/on/existing value (0/1/2):
6. Enter 1 to turn indicators ON.
(Enter 0 to turn MWI off; 2 to update MWI to current correct state).

The system prompts:
Message waiting type (0 or <CR> for all):
7. Press <Enter>.
8. Listen as the system outdials the pager company and completes the page.
Correct your dial strings as necessary.
9. To turn paging OFF, repeat Steps 5 through 7; enter 0 in Step 6.
The system prompts
Mailbox to light (1 -99999999999):
10. After all pagers are tested, press <Enter>
The system returns to the Additional Options Menu.
Note: A pager will only be dialed once during the lights test. To test the pager again, you must perform a
lights-OFF test for the mailbox before performing a lights-ON test.
Testing Message Delivery Calls

Use the Lights Test option described in "Testing Radio Pagers," to test message delivery calls. If
you make a test call, you can check system prompts and the mailbox user interface at the same
time.

To start the test:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in “Testing Radio Pagers”.
2. Log in to the test mailbox and ensure that there are no ’unplayed messages’.
3. Place a butt set on the outdial line in MONITOR position.
4. Call the mailbox and leave a message.
5. Listen on the butt set as the outdial line comes offhook and makes the call.
Listen for any error tones that may cause the call to fail. You can correct your programming
as needed; see Note, below.
6. When the telephone you called rings, answer it (or have the user answer if it is off-site).
The system says:
"Hello <mailbox name>. You have one unplayed message in your mailbox.
One message total. Please enter your passcode."
7. Enter the passcode and play the message.
If problems occur while attempting to play the message, check the following programming:
- Mailbox FCOS.
- "Other Features" programming of the pager port group; ensure that it matches
programming of the main VoiceMail application on the system.
Note: The system can outdial quickly—too quickly for some PBXs. A rapid outdialing speed may cause the
system to fail to get an outside line. When you troubleshoot your system for this type of failure, try
slowing down the outdialing speed by inserting plus signs (+) in the dialing strings. Each plus (+)
causes a one-second pause.
EXAMPLE: Using the following outdial string: T9T4155551212++G123456.

To slow down the pace of the sequence, insert two pluses (++)
after each major step in the string.
The result is: T++9++T++4155551212++++G++123456.
If this is effective, you can experiment by removing pauses to
achieve the fastest speed that your PBX can handle.
Testing Alternate Pager Activation

If you programmed an alternate pager, it is activated before the message plays and after the
frequency and interval of the primary pager expire. After testing the primary pager, repeat the test
for the alternate pager dial strings. Follow the procedure outlined in "Testing Radio Pagers"
section.
6 Recording Messages/Greetings/Tutorials
Record the Company Greeting

The Company Greeting is the message that all outside callers hear when they access the system.
You can record two greetings: one to play during regular working hours, and one to play during
evening or weekend hours. Company greetings are made by recording a greeting in the
administrator’s mailbox for each line group.

The system ports are divided into line groups. (These are shown on your Configuration Report;
see Chapter 12, "Statistics Reports".) Each line group can have a different administrator’s
mailbox and, therefore, a different company greeting. More than one administrator’s mailbox may
be configured.
EXAMPLE: With NP Receptionist, you can record appropriate greetings for the automated receptionist
number and the message center number. Separate day and night greetings can be recorded
for both administrator’s mailboxes. (If only one greeting is recorded, it is played during both
time periods.)
The software contains a pre-recorded Wait Prompt, which issues the message: "Please enter
an extension number or wait for assistance." Check your system Configuration Report to see
whether this prompt is disabled. Disabling this prompt allows you to record the text of this
message in the same voice as the rest of the company greeting.
If you do not record a personalized company greeting, NP Receptionist issues the default
greeting: "Welcome to the Automated Attendant."
To Record the Company Greeting

1. Enter the system’s main extension number to reach NP Receptionist.
2. Log in to the administrator’s mailbox:
(a) Press the * key (star).
(b) Enter the administrator’s mailbox number to enter the VoiceMail system.
(c) Press the * key (star) to indicate that you are the owner of this mailbox.
You hear the Administrator’s system greeting:
"Hello <administrator’s name>. Please enter your passcode."
3. Enter the administrator’s mailbox telephone passcode.
You are now logged in, and you hear the standard prompt.
Note: If you miss a prompt, simply wait; the automated attendant repeats prompts.
Press X (the 9 key) to exit to the previous menu.
5. Press G (the 4 key) to record a Greeting.

The system prompts:
Press D to record the day greeting, N to record the night greeting.
6. Press D (the 3 key) or N (the 6 key) and record the appropriate company greeting.
7. After you record the company greeting,
press L (the 5 key) to Listen to the greeting.
- Press A (the 2 key) to Add information to the message.
- Press D (the 3 key) to Discard the message and record a new one.
8. When you are satisfied with this greeting,
press X (the 9 key) to save the recording and return to the Main Menu.
You may need to press X (the 9 key) several times to exit to the previous menu.
9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 to record a company greeting for the other time period.

Record the Message of the Day

The Message of the Day is made by recording a greeting in the attendant’s mailbox. This
message is sent to every mailbox on the system. After the message is broadcast, it automatically
plays the next two times a user logs in.
Note: Mailboxes must have FCOS feature bit 043 to receive the Message of the Day.
More than one attendant’s mailbox may be configured on your system; the Message of the Day
must be recorded from the primary attendant’s mailbox. (The others are used only to store
messages when the primary mailbox is full.) The primary attendant’s mailbox is the first mailbox
number listed in the Configuration Report.
To Record the Message of the Day

2. Log in to the attendant’s mailbox:
(b) Enter the attendant’s mailbox number.
3. Enter the attendant’s passcode.
5. Press G (the 4 key) to record a Greeting.
The system prompts:
"Press M to change the Message of the Day..."
6. Press M (the 6 key) to Change the Message of the Day.
7. Press R (the 7 key) to Record the Message of the Day.
8. Record your message (say the Message of the Day).
9. Press R (the 7 key) to Review it.
10. When you are satisfied with this message,
11. Press L (the 5 key) to Listen to the message.
12. Press X (the 9 key) to Exit.
Delete and Change the Message of the Day

The Message of the Day can be deleted by recording a new Message of the Day. Every new
mailbox receives the Message of the Day that is stored in the attendant’s mailbox, regardless of
when the message was recorded.
If you do not regularly record a Message of the Day, you must be sure to delete messages that
are no longer up-to-date. Once deleted, users do not hear the old Message of the Day, even if

they have not logged in since the new message was created.
To Delete the Message of the Day

1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in “To Record the Message of the Day”.
3. Record (say) your message. (Option: You don’t have to record anything.)
Quickly press D (the 3 key); immediately press X (the 9 key).

"Nothing recorded. Greeting changed."
To Change the Message of the Day

1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in “To Record the Message of the Day”.
3. Press R (the 7 key) to Record the Message of the Day.
Record over your previous message (say the new Message of the Day).
Record a Site Tutorial

The site tutorial, like the Message of the Day, is made by recording a greeting in the attendant’s
mailbox. It may consist of any instructions the administrator considers necessary. This tutorial
plays after the standard tutorial when a mailbox is created or when the mailbox user enables the
tutorial feature, from the User Options Menu.
More than one attendant’s mailbox may be configured on your system. The site tutorial can be
recorded only from the primary attendant’s mailbox. (The others are used to store messages only
when the primary mailbox is full.) The primary attendant’s mailbox is the first mailbox number
listed in the Configuration Report.
To Record the Site Tutorial

2. Log in to the attendant’s mailbox:
(b) Enter the attendant’s mailbox number.
3. Enter the attendant’s passcode.
5. Press G (the 4 key).
The system prompts:
"Press M to change the Message of the Day; T to change the Site Tutorial."
6. Press T (the 8 key) to record the site Tutorial.
7. Press R (the 7 key) to Record.

8. Record your message (say the site tutorial).

9. Press R (the 7 key) to Review it.
10. When you are satisfied with the site tutorial,
The system indicates:
"Greeting changed."
11. Press L (the 5 key) to Listen to your new message.
12. Press X (the 9 key) to Exit this menu.
7 System-Wide Distribution Lists

System-wide distribution lists are created in the administrator’s mailbox. These are called master
lists, and can be accessed by any mailbox on the system. Master lists eliminate the need to store
the same large distribution list in more than one mailbox.
EXAMPLE: One list may contain the mailboxes of everyone in the company; a second list may exist for the
Personnel Department; a third may list mailboxes in the Finance Department.
Like ordinary distribution lists, master lists are created from the User Options Menu. They are
numbered from 01 to 09, like users’ personal distribution lists. When users want to send
messages to a master list, they must add an extra zero to the beginning of the list number to tell
the system to access a master list and not a personal distribution list. (For example, users enter
001 to access Master List 01.)
Create a Master Distribution List

You are now logged in; you hear the standard prompt.
5. Press L (the 5 key) to change a distribution List number.
6. Enter the list number (valid list numbers are 01 through 09).
The system indicates that you are modifying the list.
7. Press N (the 6 key) to Name the list.

- Record a list name.

- Press X (the 9 key) to save the name.
"You are modifying <list name>."
8. Press A (the 2 key) to Add a name to the list.
- Enter the number of the mailbox to be added.
The system confirms the entry:
<User’s name> added.
9. Repeat Step 7 for each mailbox to be added.
Note: Two-hundred (200) mailboxes are allowed in each distribution list.
10. Press X (the 9 key) to save your entries and exit to the Main Menu.
After you have created master lists, you should send a memo to notify each user that these lists
are available.
• Include the list number, list name, and all members of the list.
• Number the lists "001 through 009" (in your memo) to eliminate confusion.
Modify a Master Distribution List

1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in “Create a Master Distribution List”.
2. Enter the number of the list to be changed.
"You are modifying <list name>."
3. Press P (the 7 key) to Play all the members of the list.
(This step is not essential, but it may prevent you from modifying the wrong list.)
4. Press A (the 2 key) to Add a name to the list, or
Press D (the 3 key) to Delete a name.
- Enter the number of the mailbox to add/delete.
The system confirms the entry:
<User’s name> added (/deleted).
5. Repeat Step 4 for each mailbox to be added.
6. Press X (the 9 key) to save the modified list and exit to the Main Menu.
Use a Master Distribution List
To Make a Message for a Master List

• The mailbox must have feature bit 020 (Make) and feature bit 034 (Make to master
distribution list) in its FCOS.
• To give messages to a master list, the mailbox must have the feature bit 035 (Give to master
distribution list) in its FCOS.
(Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," discusses FCOS and feature bits.)

To distinguish a master list from an ordinary distribution list, users must add an extra zero (0) to
the beginning of the master list number. To send a message to the members of Master List 01,
perform the following steps:
1. Log in to your mailbox.
2. Press M to Make a message.
The system prompts: "Enter mailbox number to make message for."
3. Enter 001.
The system prompts: "Record a message for Master List <name>."
To Receive a Master Distribution List Message

• The mailbox can receive a master list message either through the Make or Give command.
• The mailbox must have the feature bit 045 (Receive master distribution list message) in its
FCOS.
8 Administration by Phone
A special feature of this system allows you to perform various administrative functions from a
telephone. The Administration by Phone feature is convenient when the system's maintenance
console is located at a distance from the workstation.
Although this feature cannot completely replace console administration, telephone administration
software supports numerous features available from the console, and it is appropriate for specific
functions discussed in this chapter.
Note: If your system has more than one line group and more than one administrator’s mailbox, you must
ensure that you call the line group associated with the administrator’s mailbox that you are using in
order to conduct Administration by Phone.
Administration by Phone is not available to mailboxes with the NP TDD line group configuration.
Telephone Administration Timing

Certain timing parameters are programmed into Administration by Phone to detect inactivity and
to safeguard the system against unauthorized use. These time-out factors make it essential for
you to be well-prepared before you begin a telephone administration session.
• Three to five seconds of response time are permitted for each prompt before it announces
“no change” and returns to the Administration Menu.
• Any activity causes a one-minute timer to start, after the system accesses administration. If
one minute lapses without input, the system automatically disconnects, and the entire access
procedure must be repeated.
- If you are running out of time, enter the digit 1 (one) in response to any prompt, to restart
the timer. The system issues an error message and repeats the prompt.

Access the Telephone Administration Menu

Administration by Phone can only be performed from the administrator’s mailbox. Follow these
steps to access the telephone Administration Menu.
You are now logged in; you hear the standard prompt.
4. When you hear the Main Menu, press U (the 8 key) for the User Options Menu.
You hear the standard User Options Menu.
Note: If you miss a prompt, simply wait; the automated attendant repeats the prompts.
As a security precaution, the system does not prompt for telephone administration.
5. Press the * key (star) to access the Administration Menu.

The system plays the telephone Administration Menu:
ADMINISTRATION MENU
(A) Add a New Mailbox
(D) Delete a Mailbox
(M) Modify a Mailbox
(P) Change a Mailbox Passcode
(K) Change System Clock
(I) Initiate Mailbox Backup to Floppy Diskette
(U) Usage Statistics
(X) Exit Administration
To Record a Name for the Administrator’s Mailbox
The system plays a greeting to the administrator when you log in.
A name may be recorded with the Name command.
1. Log in to the administrator’s mailbox by following Steps 1 to 3 in “Access the Telephone
Administration Menu”.
2. When you hear the Main Menu, press U (the 8 key) for the User Options Menu.
3. Press N (the 6 key) to change the mailbox Name.
4. Enter R (the 7 key) to Record the name.
For security reasons, do not name the mailbox "Administrator’s Mailbox". Unauthorized users
should not know that they have accessed a special-purpose mailbox.

Passcode-Protect the Administrator’s Mailbox

The administrator’s mailbox must be passcode-protected with a random passcode (see CAUTION).
This passcode may be entered or changed by using the same procedures for a user’s mailbox.
For instructions to set or clear the passcode by phone, see “Change/Reset Mailbox Passcode;
Enable/Disable Tutorial by Phone”.
Note: When your system was originally configured, the technician entered the passcode length parameter.
The passcode length controls the number of digits that can be entered from the telephone. From the
system console, you can provide greater system security by giving the administrator’s mailbox a
telephone passcode with more digits than the passcodes for other mailboxes on the system. To set
a passcode from the console, use the Set Passcode/Tutorial command from the Mailbox
Maintenance Menu. For instructions, see Chapter 4, "Mailbox Maintenance".
For more information on passcode protecting the administrator’s mailbox, see Chapter 15
"System Security."
Add a New Mailbox by Phone
Console versus Phone

There are important differences between creating a mailbox on the console and adding a new
mailbox by phone.
• Programming for NP Receptionist cannot be added by using the phone.
The system does not prompt for treatment types, mailbox extension numbers, or attendant
extension numbers.
• When Administration by Phone prompts for a three-digit class of service,

enter the FCOS.
The system accepts any FCOS number from 1 through 640, regardless of whether any
feature bits are programmed for that FCOS.
- Error messages are not issued; be certain to enter the correct FCOS.
• Enter the LCOS when Administration by Phone prompts.
The system accepts any LCOS number from 1 through 640; be certain to enter the correct
LCOS.
• Any valid message waiting indicator can be assigned to the mailbox,
but information such as paging cannot be added by phone.
This message waiting indicator does not work without extra programming. Mailboxes
requiring extra programming may be created on the maintenance console. See “Default
Message Waiting Types”.
Note: The only exception to this rule is the AC message lamp. See “AC Message Waiting Lamp Address
Codes”.

To Add a Mailbox by Phone

The following sequence shows the prompts and responses necessary to add a mailbox by phone.
This procedure can only be performed from the administrator’s mailbox.
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 to log in to the administrator’s mailbox and access the telephone
Administration Menu: see Accessing the Telephone Administration Menu.
2. Press A (the 2 key) to Add a mailbox.
3. Enter the mailbox number to add when prompted.
4. Enter a three-digit class of service (FCOS) when prompted.
5. Enter a three-digit limits class of service (LCOS).
6. Enter a two-digit message waiting type.
7. Enter a four-digit AC message waiting light address.
"Mailbox <number> added."
The system returns to the Administration Menu.
Note: To confirm that the values entered are correct, press M (the 6 key) to modify the mailbox you just
added. Press the # key (pound) in response to each prompt to leave all values unchanged.
AC Message Waiting Lamp Address Codes

An AC message waiting lamp address consists of a house code followed by a unit code. A
house code may be any letter from A through P; a unit code may be any number from 1 through
16.
EXAMPLE: A1, D5, P16.

- Address P1 is reserved for troubleshooting and diagnostics and cannot be assigned to a
mailbox.
To Enter the AC Message Waiting Lamp Address

The system prompts for a four-digit AC message waiting lamp address. Because of the limitations
of the telephone keypad, the address must be entered as follows:
1. House Code
Each of the numbers on the telephone keypad represent different letters.
• To specify the desired letter, the system requires that two numbers are
entered to represent a house code letter:
(a) Key number
(b) Position (from the left) number
EXAMPLE: The letter K is entered as 52 because K resides on the number 5 key and holds the second
position from the left (JKL).
The AC message lamp house codes are listed in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 AC Message Waiting Lamp House Codes

Letter Enter Letter Enter

A 21 I 43
B 22 J 51
C 23 K 52
D 31 L 53
E 32 M 61
F 33 N 62
G 41 O 63
H 42 P 71
2. Unit Code
Unit codes must be entered as two-digit numbers, from 1 through 16.
• Numbers from 1 through 9 are entered as 01 through 09.
Note: To confirm that the AC message waiting lamp address is entered correctly, press M (the 6 key) to
modify the mailbox you added. Press the * key (star) in response to each prompt to leave all values
unchanged. The system gives the current AC message waiting lamp address as "K1" (not 5201).
Delete a Mailbox by Phone

You can delete a single mailbox by phone, but a you cannot delete a range of mailboxes by
phone. You can only perform this procedure from the administrator’s mailbox.
2. Press D (the 3 key) to Delete a mailbox.
3. Enter the mailbox number to delete when prompted.
You hear the message:
"Mailbox [number] has <number> messages total. If you really intend to delete mailbox
<number>,
enter the mailbox number again."
4. Enter the mailbox number again.
"Mailbox deleted."
5. Press X (the 9 key) to exit the Administration Menu.
Modify a Mailbox by Phone

When Modify is selected from the Administration Menu, the system gives the current mailbox
number, class of service, mailbox type, and an AC message waiting lamp address; then, it
prompts for any changes. You can only perform this procedure from the administrator’s mailbox.

2. Press M (the 6 key) to Modify a mailbox.

3. Enter the mailbox number to modify.
The system gives the current mailbox number, class of service, mailbox type, and AC
message waiting light address, when applicable; then the system prompts you for any
changes.
Note: To leave any value unchanged, press the # key (pound) in response to the prompt.
4. Enter a new mailbox number when prompted.

5. Enter a new class of service when prompted.
6. Enter a single-digit mailbox type when prompted.
7. Enter a four-digit AC message waiting light address when prompted.
"Mailbox modified."
Change/Reset Mailbox Passcode; Enable/Disable Tutorial by Phone

You can set or clear the passcode and enable the tutorial for a mailbox by phone. This feature is
useful to start new mailbox owners on the system or to clear the passcode of a mailbox owner
who forgets his or her passcode. You can only perform this procedure from the administrator’s
mailbox.
1. Follow Steps1 through 5 to log in to the administrator’s mailbox and access the telephone
2. Press P (the 7 key) to change a mailbox Passcode.
3. Enter the number of the selected mailbox.
4. Enter the new passcode (four to 10 digits), or
Enter four 0s (zeros) to clear.
The system automatically prompts for the correct passcode length.
"Passcode for mailbox <number> cleared."
5. Press Y (the 9 key) if you want a tutorial on this mailbox, or
Press N (the 6 key) if you do not want a tutorial on this mailbox.
CAUTION: Do not give the administrator a "formula" (trivial) passcode. When you
hear the message: "I’m sorry, you cannot access your mailbox at this time.
Good-bye," it is often due to a passcode problem.
Set the System Clock (Date and Time) by Phone

You can review or alter the system date and time by phone. This feature is useful to make a one-
hour correction for daylight savings time. You can only perform this procedure from the
administrator’s mailbox.

2. Press K (the 5 key) to change the system clock.
The system says the current date and time:
"The date is currently set to <day>, <date>, <year>, <time>.
Press the * key (star) to leave any value unchanged."
Note: To leave any value unchanged, press the # key (pound) in response to the prompt.
3. Enter the one- or two-digit month.
EXAMPLE: Enter the digit 3 for the month of March;

enter the digits 12 for the month of December.
4. Enter the one- or two-digit day.
5. Enter the two-digit year.
6. Enter the three-digit time.
EXAMPLE: Enter the digits 145 for the time 1:45.

7. Press A (the 2 key) for a.m., or
Press P (the 7 key) for p.m.
"The date changed to <day>, <date>, <year>, <time>."
Perform Backup to Diskette by Phone

Backup files should be kept on floppy diskettes for record purposes and as a precaution against
loss or destruction of the configuration and history system files. It is recommended that you
regularly back up the hard drive to diskettes. The system continues to process calls during this
backup process.
To perform a backup by phone, your telephone must be close enough to the system to allow you
to insert diskettes in the floppy disk drive while you are on the phone.
For a list of information that is copied from the hard disk, go to Information Copied from Hard Disk
to Backup Diskette(s).
You should use 3.5-inch double-sided, high-density (1.44 MB) diskettes. Be sure to label and
date all backup diskettes. The system formats any diskettes that are not already formatted.
CAUTION: If you run this process without a diskette in the floppy drive, the system
does not indicate that the backup is not being completed. (The system only
records this type of error on the console.)
To Copy the Data Files to a Single Floppy Backup Diskette

2. Press I (the 4 key) to Initiate mailbox backup.

3. When prompted, insert the backup diskette in the floppy drive and press S (the 7 key) to Start
the backup process.
"Backup started <day>, <date>, <time>."
Note: If the system cannot verify the diskette, remove it from the floppy drive, reinsert it, and retry Steps 1
through 4, above.
When the backup is finished, the system does not indicate that the backup is complete;
you hear the Administration Menu.
4. Press X (the 9 key) to exit from the Administration Menu.
Report System Usage Statistics by Phone

You can use the phone to obtain system and mailbox summary usage statistics for 30 mailboxes
at a time. Instead of running a Total Statistics Report during weekly maintenance, this procedure
can be used to determine whether a manual message purge is necessary. Chapter 12, "Statistics
Reports" discusses mailbox statistics reports and message purging.
To Control the Report

• Respond to the prompt that asks you for the first mailbox number. MITEL NUPOINT
MESSENGER reports the system statistics and starts the mailbox report at the selected
mailbox. To cancel the report at this point, do not respond to the prompt.
• Extend the report by pressing C (the 2 key) after the statistics for the first 30 mailboxes are
listed (when prompted). The system responds by reporting statistics for the next 30
mailboxes.
• To stop the summary report, press any key at any time.
To Generate Usage Statistics by Phone

2. Press U (the 8 key) for Usage statistics.
3. When prompted, enter a mailbox number where you want to begin a summary.
To stop the summary, press any key, at any time.
The system reports:

"NuPoint Voice storage is <number> percent full, <number> minutes out of <number> total."
The system lists the statistics for the first mailbox:
"Mailbox <number>, <name>, has <number> messages total:
<number> urgent <number> unplayed, using <number> seconds."
The system lists the statistics for the next 29 mailboxes. When the listing is finished,
the system indicates: "End of summary."
The system plays the Administration Menu.
4. Press X (the 9 key) to exit from the Administration Menu.

Inquire About Mailboxes by Phone

Neither the Inquire nor the Search function is available by phone. However, the following
information can be obtained:
Usage Statistics:
1. Press U (the 8 key) for Usage statistics from the Administration Menu.
The system prompts:
"Enter mailbox to begin at."
Press any key to stop the report after the desired statistics have been given.
Feature Class of Service, Limits Class of Service, Message Waiting Type, and AC
Message Waiting Lamp Address:
1. Press M (the 6 key) to Modify from the Administration Menu.
2. Press the * key (star) in response to each prompt to leave the current values unchanged.

9 The Hotel/Motel Application

In a hotel or motel environment, this system provides an electronic mailbox for each guest. The
system provides advantages to guests, callers, and front-desk staff.
• Hotel and motel employees are not dedicated to the task of message-taking.
• Callers and guests are ensured message accuracy.
• Guests can listen to messages at their convenience, and they can discard or keep messages
for future reference.
• Hotels and motels can bill guests for mailbox service.
• Optional language features improve usage.
Hotel/Motel Mailbox Structure

Four basic types of mailboxes are used in the Hotel/Motel application
• Guest mailbox
• Full-feature guest mailbox
• Check-in mailbox
• Check-out mailbox
Guest Mailbox
Mailboxes with Restricted FCOS (default FCOS 3) or optional Lodging FCOS are assigned to
each guest. These FCOS are designed specifically for mailbox users and callers who may be
unfamiliar with voice messaging systems. (See Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide".)
• Restricted and Lodging mailboxes are controlled by Check-in and Check-out mailboxes.
Guests do not need to perform any mailbox set-up (such as recording names and passcodes)
before using mailboxes.
• This system integrates with the Hotel/Motel telephone system to allow guests to log in by
pressing a button on the telephone keypad and by entering a passcode when prompted.
After guests log in, the system automatically plays the first message; guests are prompted to
keep or discard messages. After the choice is made, the next message (if any) plays without
input from guests.
• Prompts are helpful to uninitiated users:

"Press K, the 5 key, to Keep this message..."
Note: All languages other than English are optional features. If an additional language is desired, the
appropriate alternate-language prompts diskettes must be installed. For a list of available languages,
contact your authorized dealer. (“Selecting Alternate Language Prompts”.)
• Callers also hear expanded prompts:

"Press R, the 7 key, to Review your message..."

Full-Feature Guest Mailbox

A hotel or motel may wish to assign the full-feature guest mailbox. This mailbox has Full Guest
FCOS 2, which is the same as Unlimited FCOS (FCOS 1) except that the Check-in/Check-out
feature is enabled. The desk clerk must still check this mailbox; however, guests can change
names and passcodes, record personal greetings, and make messages for other guests’
mailboxes. (“FCOS 2—Full Guest” provides a complete description of full-feature guest FCOS
capabilities.)
Check-In Mailbox
The Check-in mailbox is used to record names and passcodes for guests. This mailbox has
FCOS 4. Several desk clerks can call into a single Check-in mailbox at one time. This means that
you need to create only one Check-in mailbox for your system. (“FCOS 4—Check-In”.)
Check-Out Mailbox
A Check-out mailbox is used to clear a recorded name and any messages stored in the guest’s
mailbox. This mailbox has FCOS 5. Several desk clerks can call into a single Check-out mailbox
at one time. You need to create only one Check-out mailbox for your system. (“FCOS 5—Check-
Out”.)
How the Hotel/Motel Application Works
Check-In
When the guest checks in, the desk clerk calls a Check-in mailbox and records a name and
passcode to personalize a mailbox for the guest.
Mailbox Check-In Procedure

The clerk must perform the following mailbox check-in procedure:
1. When the guest checks in
(a) Dial the system’s main extension number.
The company greeting plays.
(b) Press the * key (star).

NP Receptionist says: "Welcome to the Message Centre. Please enter a mailbox number, or
wait."
(c) Enter the number of the Check-in mailbox.
If the Check-in mailbox has a passcode, you will be prompted to enter it now.
The system prompts: "Enter mailbox number to check in."

2. Enter the mailbox number assigned to the room that the guest will occupy.
The system prompts: "Record a name" (beep).
3. Record the guest’s name.

The system requests a passcode.

4. Enter a four-digit passcode.
The system confirms: "Passcode set to <number>. Check-in complete. Good-bye."
The system disconnects the clerk.
Note: If the system is not fully integrated (the guest cannot pick up messages by pressing a button), the
clerk must give the guest his or her passcode and mailbox number.
During the Guest’s Stay

When the guest is out of the room, or when the phone is busy, the operator transfers calls to
voice mail. Callers are prompted to "Please leave a message for <guest’s name>."
When the guest returns, a message waiting indicator on the telephone notifies the guest when
there are unplayed messages in the mailbox. The mailbox passcode provided by the desk clerk at
check-in time assures the guest that all messages remain confidential.
Check-Out
When the guest checks out, the mailbox is also checked out. A mailbox check-out clears the
mailbox of the guest’s name and passcode, announces the number of unplayed messages, and
offers the desk clerk the opportunity to discard any messages stored in the mailbox.
Mailbox Check-Out Procedure

The clerk must perform the following mailbox check-out procedure:
1. When the guest checks out
(a) Dial the system’s main extension number.
The company greeting plays.
(b) Press the * key (star).
NP Receptionist says: "Welcome to the Message Centre. Please enter a mailbox number or
wait."
(c) Enter the number of the Check-out mailbox.
If the Check-in mailbox has a passcode, you will be prompted to enter it now.
The system prompts: "Enter mailbox number to check out."

2. Enter the departing guest’s mailbox number.
"Mailbox <number> has <number> unplayed messages.
Press K to keep the messages, D to discard them," or
"Mailbox <number> has no messages. Check-out complete, good-bye."
3. Press D (the 3 key) to Discard any messages.
Note: To successfully check out the mailbox, the clerk must discard the messages. If the remaining
messages are not discarded, the system responds:
"Check-out canceled, good-bye."

Billing
To bill guests, a Termination Report is run for each mailbox. This report can be run either before
or after the mailbox is checked out, but the results may vary.
• If the Termination Report is run before the mailbox is checked out and there are unplayed
messages, the system does not charge for disk usage for these messages because this
resource is calculated after messages are deleted.
• If the Termination Report is run after the mailbox is checked out, the system charges for all
messages because all messages must be deleted in order to check out the mailbox.
For details and a sample report, see “Termination Report”.
To Run the Termination Report

To run the Termination Report, follow the steps outlined in “To Run the Termination Report”.
10 Special TAS Considerations

This system contains an application designed specifically for Telephone Answering Service (TAS)
Bureau use. This chapter highlights features useful to a TAS bureau.
Feature and Limits Classes of Service

Individual privileges and restrictions can be added to build customized Feature and Limits
Classes of Service (FCOS and LCOS). Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," provides details
on FCOS, LCOS, and other classes of service.
DID Mailboxes
DID mailboxes allow callers to dial a telephone number that is answered with the mailbox
greeting. While some systems can use the PBX forwarding capability to allow the voice mail
system to answer calls with the user’s mailbox greeting, DID mailboxes answer the calls directly.
Logging in to DID Information-Only Mailboxes (Including Greeting-Only

Mailboxes)
Mailboxes with Greeting-only, Chain, and Time classes of service (and any other FCOS that
issue greetings and do not receive outside caller messages) are collectively referred to as
Information-only mailboxes. The login procedure for DID Information-only mailboxes differs from
the procedure for mailboxes with other FCOS.
To Log in to a DID Information-Only Mailbox

To eliminate confusion, subscribers who choose DID Information-only mailboxes should be
informed of this login procedure.

1. Press the * key (star), or 0 key (zero), while the greeting is playing.
This process does not interrupt the greeting; the greeting continues to play.
The system prompts you to enter a passcode (if mailbox is passcode protected).
Note: You do not have to wait for the prompt, but you must wait until the entire greeting plays before
entering your passcode.
2. Enter your passcode.

You are now logged in.
Recording the First Greeting for DID Information-Only Mailboxes

New DID Information-only mailboxes do not have greetings. When a new user tries to access the
mailbox to record a greeting, the system responds: "That is not a valid mailbox number." The user
must press the * key (star) or 0 key (zero) (while "That is not a valid mailbox number" plays) and
enter the passcode.
This procedure can be confusing for a new user. To alleviate the confusion, perform the following
steps:
1. Initially assign Unlimited FCOS (FCOS 1) to the mailbox.
2. Log in to the mailbox, and record a greeting to welcome the new subscriber.
3. After the greeting is recorded, use the Modify command to give the mailbox
the correct FCOS (“Modify a Mailbox by Phone”).
Login Tip for DID Mailbox Users

When a subscriber has a DID mailbox that can receive messages (non-Information-only class of
service), toll charges can be saved by using this tip:
When a user calls in to check for messages and the phone rings, the user should hang up
immediately. Ringing indicates that no unplayed messages exist in the mailbox; if users hang
up before the system answers, the call is not charged. If the system answers the call with the
mailbox greeting before callers hear ringing, there are unplayed messages in the mailbox.
The Message Attendant Application

Designed specifically for TAS bureau use, the Message Attendant application provides an open
line for TAS operators to dictate messages into client mailboxes. The open line allows the
operator to access client mailboxes quickly. Because clients retrieve their messages by calling
the system and logging into their mailboxes in the standard manner, operator time is not required
for this function.
Message Attendant Prompts and Commands

The Message Attendant application uses three different tones to prompt the operator. As with
other applications, the system issues a "beep" tone when prompting to record a name, greeting,
or message. A "beep-beep" home base tone, tells the operator that the system is waiting for input
of a mailbox number. As soon as the system knows the mailbox number, it issues a "bloop-bloop"

pause mode indicator and waits for further commands from the operator. The commands to
record a message are as follows:
Key Pressed Operation
2 or # Begin record mode. This command is used both to begin a message
and to append to a message just recorded.
3 Discard message, and return to Pause mode.
7 Review message, and return to Pause mode.
1, 9, or * Send message, and exit to home base.
* Return to home base from either Record or Pause mode.
This command also saves any recording made.
TAS Operator Procedures

The TAS operator must deliver messages to the client’s mailbox. In addition, the operator may be
required to change the name, greeting, and/or passcode for a mailbox.
To Leave a Message in a Mailbox

1. Seat the headphone jack, dial into the system, and hear the characteristic "beep-beep" home
base tone.
2. Answer the call, dial the called party’s mailbox number, and hear the "bloop-bloop" pause
mode indicator.
3. Press the 2 key or # key (pound) to begin recording, hear the "beep" record prompt tone,
and dictate the message.
4. Press the 1 key, 9 key, or * key (star) to send the message, and hear the "beep-beep" home
base tone.
You are now ready to answer the next call.
or
Press R (the 7 key) to Review, press D (the 3 key) to Discard, and press the 1 key, 9 key, or
* key (star), to send the message.
To Record Names and Greetings and Enter Passcodes

If the client’s mailbox is capable of being checked in and out, the TAS operator can change the
client’s name, greeting, or passcode.
Note: To give a mailbox the capability of being checked in and out, the Administrator must answer Y to the
question: "Can mailbox be checked in or out?" when the mailbox is created.
To Change the Name, Greeting, or Passcode of a Mailbox

1. Seat the headphone jack, dial into the system, and hear the characteristic "beep-beep" home
base tone.
2. Dial the mailbox number, and hear the "bloop-bloop" pause mode indicator.
3. Enter one of the following commands:
To Record a Name:

1. Press N (the 6 key).

The system responds: "Record a new name for <mailbox number>. (Beep)"
2. Record the mailbox user’s name.
3. Press the 1 key, 9 key, or * key (star), to save the recorded name
and return to the home base tone.
To Record a Greeting:
1. Press G (the 4 key).

The system responds: "Record a new greeting for <user’s name>. (Beep)"
2. Record a greeting for the mailbox user’s callers.
3. Press the 1 key, 9 key, or * key (star) to save the greeting
and return to the home base tone.
To Enter or Change a Mailbox Passcode:
1. Press the 5 key.

"Enter a four-digit passcode for <user’s name>, four zeros to clear the passcode. (Beep)"
2. Enter the new passcode and hear the "beep-beep" home base tone.
Message Delivery
Message Delivery is a new-message notification service. When a message is left in a user’s
mailbox, the system calls the user at a preconfigured telephone number, waits for the telephone
to be answered, and prompts: "Hello <name recorded in mailbox>. You have <number> unplayed
message(s) in your mailbox. Please enter your passcode." When a passcode is entered, the user
is logged into the mailbox and can play the message and/or use features (make, give, answer)
permitted by the class of service for that mailbox.
The system prompts for the passcode 1 (one), and waits 30 seconds for a response. If someone
other than the user answers the telephone and does not know the passcode, the system hangs
up and counts the call as a successful page. (Unsuccessful pages occur when the system
encounters a busy tone or reorder tone.)
Message Delivery is a subset of the Pager message waiting indicator type. For instructions to
configure this application, refer to Chapter 5, "Pagers and Message Delivery."
Guidelines for Pager and Message Delivery Allocation

The system ports that outdial pages are dedicated exclusively to paging. This restriction means
that there are fewer ports available to accept incoming calls. For a discussion on the use of ports,
refer to “Guidelines for Pager and Message Delivery Allocation”.
Special Pager and Message Delivery Billing Considerations

The billing system is capable of billing both paging and message delivery on a per-page basis.
The system installation site, as the calling party, is responsible for any charges that accrue when

paging or message delivery calls are made to the outside telephone network. While pager calls
are usually short in duration, message delivery calls can be quite long. Because the cost of each
call depends on the time of day, the duration of the call, the distance between the TAS bureau
and the user, and the rates of the local telephone company, the system does not make any
provisions for the particular aspects of billing.
The billing rates structure allows you to specify an individual rate for each pager system. This rate
is multiplied by the number of pages issued for the mailbox. If you put message delivery accounts
and radio pager accounts on separate pager systems, you can increase the charges on pager
systems servicing message delivery subscribers (to compensate for any toll charges the
telephone company may levy).
11 System Information Reports

This system generates three types of reports.
• Statistics reports cover how system resources are used and are discussed in Chapter 12,
"Statistics Reports".
• Billing reports provide a breakdown of charges for individual mailboxes by statistic and
calculate the total amount due. These reports are discussed in Chapter 13, "Billing Reports".
• Information reports provide specific information on how the system is configured or
programmed. Information reports are discussed in this chapter.
The system records information for many uses, such as determining the status of the system,
troubleshooting a problem, maintaining a history of software installed on the system, checking
mailbox activity, or administering mailboxes.
The reports are accessed through the Reports Menu (enter R from the Main Menu) that displays
the available choices:
REPORTS
(B) Billing
(C) Configuration
(D) Pre-extension Dial Strings
(E) LCOS
(F) FCOS
(G) GCOS
(H) NCOS
(I) System Information
(J) Phonebook Report
(K) Redundancy Verify Report
(L) Logfile
(M) Mailbox Data
(R) Pager Access Codes
(S) Statistics
(T) Receptionist Treatments
(V) Offline Verify
(X) Exit

Reports can be directed to the console or to a serial port; they can be displayed, saved, or
printed. When you run each report, the system prompts you to choose a report destination.
Choose from the following options:
CP to send the report to the console without pausing.to send the report to the
console and pause as the screen fills.
1 to send the report to serial port #1.
F to send the report to a file on the system.
A to append the report to an existing file on the system.
X to exit report output options (no report).
When sending a report to the console, use the following commands to control scrolling:
CTRL-S to stop scrolling.
CTRL-Q to resume scrolling.
CTRL-C to discontinue the report.
When viewing a report:

Press the space bar to move ahead one page at a time.
Press <Enter> to move ahead one line at a time.
Enter Q when you reach the "END" of the report.
After the system runs the report, it returns to a shortened version of the Reports Menu.
Note: When displaying a long report on the console, you may encounter problems pausing the display,
then restarting it. For example: if CTRL-S stops scrolling, but CTRL-Q does not restart scrolling,
check whether CTRL-Scroll Lock or Esc Esc displays the prompt "Press any key to continue..."
Configuration Report
The programming instructions needed to process calls are contained in the system configuration
file. The Configuration Report allows you to see what is in this file.
You can see, by line group, the parameters set for each configured application and each
configured optional feature.
To Run the Configuration Report

For instructions to run the report, an example, and an explanation of the output, refer to Chapter
2, "First Administration Session."
Pre-extension Dial Strings Report

NP Receptionist is a program that automatically answers calls and requests the extension
number of the called party. When a caller enters an extension number, NP Receptionist converts
it to a mailbox number. The system then checks the mailbox’s extension number field (of this
mailbox) for the actual extension number to outdial.

A pre-extension dial string is a series of instructions and/or characters that the system must
outdial before dialing the mailbox extension number.
EXAMPLE: The dial string may consist of the dialing sequence and account code for a non-"Dial 1" long-
distance carrier. If the string does not match one of the pre-extension dial strings configured by
the system technician, you must enter this string in the extension number field of every mailbox
that outdials to this carrier.
When an appropriate pre-extension dial string has been configured, users can select the string by
simply entering an index number in the pre-extension index field.
The report displays the pre-extension dial strings associated with each index configured for
mailboxes served by NP Receptionist.
The Pre-extension Dial Strings Report and the Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types Report
are the two reports which show NP Receptionist configuration. (“To Run the Receptionist
Day/Night Treatment Types Report”).
To Run the Pre-extension Dial Strings Report

1. Enter D from the Reports Menu.
The system prompts you to choose the report destination:
(C) Console (Screen)
(P) Console with Pause
(1) Serial Port 1
(2) Serial Port 2
(F) File...
(A) Append to File...
(X) Exit (No Report)
2. Enter the report destination.

The system provides a list of predial strings, or it indicates:
No Pre-extension dial strings configured; then it returns to the Reports Menu.
Limits Class of Service (LCOS) Report

A Limits Class of Service (LCOS) is assigned to each mailbox when the mailbox is created.
LCOS allow you to control system resources, such as speech and message storage. LCOS are
detailed in "Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide".
The LCOS Report lists each LCOS and the limits that are set for each parameter. A sample
LCOS Report is provided in Figure 11-1.
To Run the LCOS Report

1. Enter E from the Reports Menu.
The system prompts you to choose a report destination.

The system runs the report and returns to the Reports Menu.
Figure 11-1 Sample LCOS Report
Reading the LCOS Report

Refer to “LCOS Parameters”, for details on report categories.
Feature Class of Service (FCOS) Report

A Feature Class of Service (FCOS) is assigned to each mailbox when the mailbox is created. The
FCOS feature bits grant privileges or impose restrictions on mailboxes. FCOS are detailed in
"Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide".
The FCOS Report lists each FCOS and the numbers of the assigned feature bits. Figure 11-2
shows an excerpt from a sample FCOS Report.
To Run the FCOS Report

1. Enter F from the Reports Menu.
The system runs the report, and then returns to the Reports Menu.
Figure 11-2 Smaple FCOS Report
Group Class of Service (GCOS) Report

The Group Class of Service (GCOS) provides a way to manage the mailboxes with which a
particular set of system users can communicate. A GCOS must be included in every mailbox
configuration for the mailbox owner to send and receive messages. GCOS are detailed in
"Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide".
To Run the GCOS Report

1. Enter G from the Reports Menu.
Network Class of Service (NCOS) Report

The Network Class of Service (NCOS) controls users’ access to the network. NCOS settings
control whether a mailbox owner can send, give, or answer messages over the network. It is part
of the NP Net Digital Network optional feature.

Instructions to access the NCOS menu and to configure NCOS are provided in "Chapter 3,
"Mailbox Reference Guide".
To Run the NCOS Report

1. Enter H from the Reports Menu.
System Information Report

The System Information Report provides the following details:
• Date of the report
• Disk serial number
• Release and revision numbers of software currently installed
• Storage capacity of hard disk (in hours)
• Ports and links
• Optional features installed
To Run the System Information Report

1. Enter I from the Reports Menu.
The system runs the report, and then returns to the Reports Menu.
Phonebook Report
The system allows you to produce a phonebook that lists mailbox owners. The Phonebook
Report is an alphabetical listing of mailbox names. It shows the corresponding mailbox number
and GCOS assigned to the mailbox. You can print the report or display it on the maintenance
console.
The system uses the Dial-by-Name database to create a phonebook when you choose the
Phonebook Report option from the Reports Menu. The mailbox owner’s name is included in the
Dial-by-Name database only when the
• Dial-by-Name function is enabled
• Feature bit 092 (User will be in Dial-by-Name database) is assigned to the mailbox FCOS.
To Run the Phonebook Report

1. Enter J for Phonebook Report from the Reports Menu.


The system displays, saves, or prints an alphabetical list of every mailbox owner’s name,
mailbox number, and the GCOS assigned to the mailbox.
Logfile Report
The logfile is a record of any detected module or system errors and the date and time of any
system resets. An excerpt from a sample Logfile Report for a single-module system is shown in
Figure 11-3.
To Run the Logfile Report

You are advised to review and clear all logfiles on a weekly basis. The Logfile Report can
become extensive and, therefore, time-consuming to scroll through.
View the Logfile

1. Enter L from the Reports menu.
The system displays the Logfile menu:
LOGFILE MENU
(C) Choose Logfile Serial Redirection
(T) Toggle Display Between Console and Logfile
(S) Show Logfile
(D) Delete Logfile
(X) Exit
2. Enter S to show the logfile.

The system prompts:
Which module’s logfile do you want to review (<CR> to exit):1
Which Module?
3. Press <Enter> to review the logfile (the module logfile number is always 1).
The system runs the report and prompts you to review another logfile or exit to the Logfile
Menu.
Which Module?
4. Press <Enter> to exit the option.
The system returns to the Reports Menu.
CAUTION: If you are unsure of the meaning or importance of any logfile message, do
not clear (delete) the logfile until you consult with the system technician
or your distributor. (“Reading the Logfile Report”.)
Logfile Redirection
If you do not want to send log data to the serial port, type . (a period) at the "Redirect serial port"
prompt.
The toggle display option switches the display between the console and the logfile. Use this

feature
• Whenever the hard disk has run out of room to save the log data; or
• If you want to see the login activity momentarily.
To Redirect the Logfile

1. Enter L from the Reports Menu.
The system displays the Logfile Menu.
2. Enter C to send log data to a logfile and a serial port at the same time.
The system prompts:
Enter file name to save log data = [/usr/vm/log/logfile]
Continue to Step 3 in To Specify Where to Send the Logfile" below.
Enter T to see the display on the console without saving it on the logfile, or if you want to
redirect log data to the logfile.
See Chapter 12 of Reference and Configuration, for details on serial redirection options.
To Specify Where to Send the Logfile

2. Enter C to Choose Logfile Serial Redirection.
The system prompts:
Enter file name to save log data = [/usr/vm/log/logfile]
This indicates the default directory for the file.
3. Press <Enter> to accept the default file name shown in brackets, or

Enter a file name (25 characters or less).
The system prompts:
Redirect logfile output to:
1: /dev/ser1, serial port 1
2: /dev/ser2, serial port 2
3: /dev/con1, console
4: Clear redirection
Current serial port redirection is: [ ]
Enter number from 1 to 4.
4. Enter the number to designate where you want to send the logfile, or
Press <Enter> to accept the redirection number as shown in the brackets.
If a number is not listed in the brackets, the logfile is sent to the hard disk. To print the logfile,
enter the number of the serial port where the printer is attached.
The system prompts:

Redirect Serial Port is set to [ ]
Save logfile changes (Y/N) [N]?
5. Enter Y to save changes, or
Enter N to exit without saving changes.

Figure 11-3 Sample Logfile Report
Reading the Logfile Report

The logfile maintains the following format:
<sitecode><m> <tid>(task_name>) <date> <time>: <error message> <code>

<sitecode> Site code assigned to module (serial output only)
<m> Module where failure occurred
<tid> Task ID of program reporting problem
<task_name> Name of system resource
<date> Date of occurrence
<time> Time of occurrence
<error Type of error that occurred
message> (may also indicate resets and other system activity)
<code> Failure code
Error messages are described in Error Log Messages (see the Troubleshooting volume). If you
are unsure of the meaning or importance of any logfile message, do not clear the logfile until
you consult with the system technician or your distributor.
To Delete the Logfile Report

2. Enter D to Delete.
The system prompts:
Which module?
3. Press <Enter>; the module logfile number is always 1.
The system prompts:
Clear the logfile?
4. Enter Y to continue and delete the logfile.
Enter N to keep the logfile.
5. Press <Enter> to exit the option.
The system returns to the Reports Menu.
Mailbox Data Report

Several reports present mailbox configuration data. These reports are available through the
Reports Menu and through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
• The Mailbox Data Report is available through the Reports Menu; it is keyed to the mailboxes
themselves, and it provides statistics for every mailbox on the system. Figure 11-4 shows
an excerpt from a sample Mailbox Data Report.
• The reports available through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu are keyed to search criteria

that you specify; they allow you to obtain statistics on specific mailboxes.
Refer to Chapter 4 for procedures to run these reports: the Mailbox Data Inquiry Report, the
Mailbox Block Inquiry Report, and the Mailbox Dump Report.
To Run the Mailbox Data Report

1. Enter M from the Reports Menu.
The system prompts you to choose the report destination.
Figure 11-4 Sample Mailbox Data Report
Reading the Mailbox Data Report

The data fields of the Mailbox Data Report are described in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1 Mailbox Data Report Fields
Mailbox Mailbox number

Msgs Total number of played and unplayed messages in the mailbox
Unplayed Number of unplayed messages
Urgent Number of urgent messages
Receipt Number of messages received
LCOS Limits Class of Service (LCOS) assigned to the mailbox
( : <LCOS name> : <LCOS number>)
FCOS Feature Class of Service (FCOS) assigned to the mailbox
GCOS Group Class of Service (GCOS) assigned to the mailbox
NCOS Network Class of Service (NCOS) assigned to the mailbox
TCOS Tenant Class of Service (TCOS) assigned to the mailbox
RCOS Restriction Class of Service (RCOS) assigned to the mailbox
Bad Logs Number of times in the present passcode trip period that an
invalid passcode was entered
Last Log Data of the last mailbox-owner login
"Never" indicates that the mailbox owner has not yet logged into
the new mailbox
Mins Disk usage in minutes of speech (nearest tenth of a minute)
Passwd Shows whether the mailbox is passcode protected (Y), or
not passcode protected (N)
Tutor Shows whether the default tutorial for a new mailbox owner is
activated (Y), or not activated (N)
Day NP Receptionist day treatment type
Night NP Receptionist night treatment type
Name Name assigned to the mailbox
Code Department code assigned to the mailbox
Exten Extension number to call (NP Receptionist only)
Index Extension pre-dial index (NP Receptionist only)

Attend DN Extension number of human attendant

(for example, lobby receptionist)
Index Pre-dial index for human attendant extension
Access Code caller must enter to hear a mailbox greeting
Notification Shows whether the mailbox has pager/outdial notification (Y), or
no notification (N)
Internal Index Index number representing the access code for internal calls
Billed Index Index number representing the access code for outdials to be
charged to a billing account
Non-billed Index Index number representing the access code for outdials
not charged to a billing account
Call Placement Shows whether call placement outdials are billed (B),
Index or unbilled (U), or treated as internal outdials (I)
time Zone Offset The offset (hours) between the time zone in which the mailbox
owner is located and the time zone in which the server is
located
Distribution Lists with Number(s) of distribution lists in the mailbox that the owner is
Change Rights allowed to change
Distribution Lists with Number(s) of distribution lists in the mailbox that the owner is
Review Rights allowed to review
Phoneline Exceptions Report

The System Phoneline Exceptions Report shows any phoneline exceptions set for the lines in
each module. The report includes telephone parameters that changed from the default values.
You can obtain a report for all lines or specific lines.
To Run the Phoneline Exceptions Report

1. Enter P from the Reports Menu.
The system lists the phoneline exceptions by line or reports: all parameters set to defaults.
The system prompts:
Triplets to report:
3. Enter the line triplet(s) to report.
The actual triplet (line number) is used to define the line:
Enter the triplet as: <module>:<slot>:<port>.

Line number range: <module>:<slot>:<port>- <module>:<slot>:<port>.
Wild card entry * (all lines all modules), or <module>:* (all lines on <module>,
or <module>:<slot>:* (all ports on <module>:<slot>).
Enter multiple values, as described, and separate by commas.
For a discussion of triplets, see Step 2: Define Line Group in Offline Menu.
4. Press <Enter> to return to the Reports Menu.

Pager Access Codes Report

The Pager (Systems) Access Codes Report shows the index number, name, access code, and
hold time of each supported pager system. Figure 11-5 provides a sample report.
To see all parameters configured for supported pager systems, obtain a system Configuration
Report.
To Run the Pager Access Codes Report

1. Enter R from the Reports Menu.
The system runs the report and returns to a shortened version of the Reports Menu.
Figure 11-5 Sample Pager Access Codes Report
Statistics Reports
Chapter 12 reviews the various statistics reports available from the Statistics Menu.
NP Receptionist Treatments Report

NP Receptionist offers two reports to show NP Receptionist configuration:
(a) Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types Report

Each mailbox configuration contains day and night treatment types that tell the system how
mailbox owners want calls handled under different conditions. The Receptionist Day/Night
Treatment Types Report displays the treatment types that you can choose when you create
mailboxes. Figure 11-6 shows a sample report.
- See the instructions that follow to run the Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types
Report.
Note: Some treatment types will not be available when NP Receptionist is configured to perform a blind
call transfer (put the called party on hold, dial the number, and hang up). See “Hidden (’Blind’)
Mailbox Extension Number Programming”.
(b) Pre-extension Dial Strings Report

- See Pre-extension Dial Strings Report to run the Pre-extension Dial Strings Report.
Chapter 3 discusses NP Receptionist treatment types.
To Run the Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types Report

1. Enter T from the Reports Menu.

Figure 11-6 Sample Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types Report
Reading the Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types Report

The sample report (Figure 11-6) shows 10 Extension treatment types. Refer to Table 11-2 for a
description of the fields.
Table 11-2 Receptionist Day/Night Treatment Types Report Fields
Extension Types Treatment types

Index Index number that represents each treatment type
Name Descriptive name that identifies each treatment type
Auth Time Authorized time period(s) when this number may be accessed
(A = all, D = day, N = night)
Auth Code Authorization code (usually a number) that the caller must enter before NP
Receptionist rings the extension. Special codes:
M = enter any valid mailbox number
P = enter a valid passcode
blank field = an authorization code is not necessary
Redial Dflt Redial menu that plays when Redial is selected for any extension failure
condition
RNA Action taken when the extension rings but there is no answer:
R = play the default Redial menu (see "Redial Dflt" field above)
A = transfer to an assistance number
M = prompt the caller to leave a message in the mailbox
Busy Action taken when the extension is busy:
R = play the default Redial menu
Rej Action taken when call screening is in effect and the recipient rejects the
call:
Screen Shows whether the user wants NP Receptionist to screen all outside calls:
Y = yes, N = no
Trunk Types Trunk treatment types
Connect Connect criteria; the conditions under which the server should consider the
trunk call to be successful:
C = Cut through, R = Ring, T = Tone (dial or modem)
Failure Action taken when the connect criteria for the trunk call are not met:
Offline Verify Report

To run Verify with the system offline, see “Run Verify”.

12 Statistics Reports
The system contains a statistics package that offers a complete picture of system resource use.
Several statistics reports provide this information, which is summarized in Table 12-1.
Table 12-1 Summary of Statistics Reports
Report Description
Line Group Usage–All Shows the number of times, in a specified period, that every
Trunks Busy (ATB) port in a line group is busy and the total number of seconds that
Statistics this condition occurs within that time period.
Line Group Usage– Shows the number of seconds that an individual port in a line group is
Line–Statistics busy and the number of calls received by that port, within a specified
time period. (This report is similar to Line Usage Statistics except that
it is at the line group level.)
Line UsageStatistics Shows the number of seconds that an individual port is busy, and the
number of calls each line receives over a specified reporting period.
Mailbox Statistics Shows mailbox usage. Several reports are available through the
Mailbox Maintenance Menu (Mailbox Data Inquiry Report, Mailbox
Block Inquiry Report, Mailbox Dump Report) and the Mailbox Statistics
Menu option of the Statistics Menu (Total Speech and Account
Breakdown, Idle Mailboxes, Mailbox Totals Report).
Message CountsUsage Shows the number of messages received, the number available, and
Statistics the percentage of message storage available for a specified time
period.
Speech BlocksUsage Shows the amount of speech storage units in use and the amount
Statistics available over a specified time period.
Fax GroupUsage Shows transactions, use, resources, and busy line information for
Statistics NuPoint Fax groups.
Complete Summary Shows a summary of all report statistics. Also called "Total Statistics
Summary Report".
Total SystemStatistics Shows the amount of storage capacity consumed on the hard disk and
the amount available.
Virtual Drive Statistics Shows the amount of storage capacity consumed on each of the drive
partitions and the amount available.
Network UsageStatistics Shows network messaging activity for a specified reporting
period.
Statistics reports are accessed through the Statistics Menu (enter R from the Main Menu, then
enter S from the Reports Menu) which displays the available choices:
STATISTICS MENU
(A) Line Group Usage - ATB
(C) Complete Summary Report
(F) Fax Group Usage
(G) Line Group Usage - Line
(L) Line Usage
(M) Message Counts Usage
(N) Network Statistics
(R) Mailbox Statistics

(S) Speech Blocks Usage

(T) Total System Statistics
(V) Virtual Drive Statistics
(X) Exit
Statistics reports provide

• Any or all parts of the most recent seven days’ activities.
• Standard reports which display resource usage data in 15-minute increments
for each hour of the chosen interval.
• Summary reports which display one set of data for the entire time period.
Reports can be directed to the console or to a serial port; they can be displayed, saved, or
printed. When you run each report, the system prompts you to choose a report destination.
Choose from the following options:
C to send the report to the console without pausing.
P to send the report to the console and pause as the screen fills.
F to send the report to a file on the system.
A to append the report to an existing file on the system.
X to exit report output options (no report).
When sending a report to the console, use the following commands to control scrolling:
CTRL-S to stop scrolling.
CTRL-Q to resume scrolling.
CTRL-C to discontinue the report.
Line Group Usage Report–(All Trunks Busy) ATB Statistics

The Line Group Usage Report, also called the Line Groups–All Trunks Busy Report, shows how
many times and for how many seconds every port in a line group is busy simultaneously. This
condition is called All Trunks Busy, or ATB.
• Two counters are used for this resource: seconds and number.
The system checks each line group every second for an ATB condition and adds one second
to the group’s seconds counter every time the condition occurs. The number counter is also
incremented. Neither counter is incremented if at least one trunk within a group is not busy.
Note: You must specify the line group(s), the start and stop times, and the start and stop days for the
report.
The report can be presented as the Line Group Usage Report or the Line Usage Report. An
excerpt from a sample standard report is shown in Figure 12-1. Reports may be requested for
any or all parts of the most recent seven days’ activities. You can display data for a single line
group or a range of line groups.

To Run the Line Group Usage (ATB) Report

1. Enter A for Line Group Usage (ATB) from the Statistics Menu (enter S from the Reports
Menu).
The system displays the Line Group ATB Report Menu.
LINE GROUP ATB REPORT MENU
(A) Beginning Group (1 - 24) = [1]
(B) Ending Group (1 - 24) = [24]
(C) Beginning Hour (0 - 23) = [8]
(D) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]
(E) Beginning Day (0 - 6) = [1]
(F) Ending Day (0 - 6) = [5]
(G) Summary = [N]
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Choose the group or range of groups to report:
Enter A and the number of the first group in the range to report.
Enter B and the number of the last group in the range to report.
Enter the same group number for both A and B to report only one group.
3. Enter C to select the time interval for the data to display:

Enter the first hour of the time period to report (0 = midnight; 12 = noon.)
Enter D and the last hour of the time period.
Notice that the default values are 8 (8 a.m.) to 17 (5 p.m.)

The system retains statistical data for one week (7 days); 0 = Sun., 1 = Mon., 2 = Tue. ... 6 =
Sat. The default is Mon - Fri.
4. Enter R to run the report.
5. Select the report destination.
The Line Group Usage Report displays All Trunks Busy data for each line group, in 15-minute
increments, for each hour of the chosen interval.
The Line Usage Report shows a single value for each line group.
Note: Reports always run in the order of ascending date. If you designate a beginning hour that is greater
than the ending hour, the report automatically switches them. However, if the beginning day number
is greater than the ending day number, the report will wrap-around. For example, if the beginning
day is 03 and the ending day is 01, the report order will be: 03, 04, 05, 06, 01.
Figure 12-1 Sample Line Group Usage (ATB) Report
Reading the Line Group Usage (ATB) Report

In the sample report, the heading shows the date and time that the report was run.

The first line shows the date of the first statistic in the report and the time interval when the data
was gathered.
PORT GROUP
The data displayed immediately below this entry refer to Line Group 1.
DAY = 01 HOUR = 15
The data displayed refers to the hour between 3 p.m. and 4 p.m. on Monday. Entry 00-14
indicates that the data in the column was gathered during the first 15-minutes of the hour; 15-29
refers to the second 15-minutes of the hour; 30-44 refers to the third 15-minutes of the hour; 45-
59 refers to the final 15-minutes of the hour.
TOTAL
The data for the four 15-minute intervals. If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value, it
means that data have not been gathered.
EXAMPLE: If the report is run at 3:30 p.m., and the report interval is for hours 12 - 15 (noon to 3 p.m.), the
entries for hour 15 (3 to 4 p.m.) show hyphens.
BUSY
The percentage of the hour when all trunks were busy.
EXAMPLE: Between 3 p.m. and 4 p.m., Group 1 had an ATB condition that occurred for 150 out of 3600
seconds; this would be 4% of the time.
ATB_SEC
The total number of seconds in the time period that an ATB condition occurred.
ATB_CNT
The number of times that an ATB condition occurred. The counter is incremented when an ATB
condition first occurs. The ATB condition must clear and reoccur before the counter is
incremented again.
EXAMPLE: If you had an ATB condition that lasted for 3 seconds, the ATB-SEC counter increases by 3,
but the ATB_CNT counter is increased by 1.
HIGHEST ATB_SEC
The greatest total amount of time that ATB conditions occurred in a fifteen-minute interval for the
period reported. (It does not mean the longest single interval during which an ATB occurred.) In
other words, this period is the busiest during the interval reported.
LOWEST ATB_SEC
The least total amount of time that ATB conditions occurred in a fifteen-minute interval for the
period reported. (It does not mean the shortest single interval during which an ATB occurred.)
This period has the slowest traffic during the interval reported.
Reading the Line Usage Report

The Line Usage Report (summary) displays the line groups by numbers and provides the total
number of seconds, the total number of times, and the total percentage of time that an ATB
condition occurred in that line group for the entire period reported.
This report is less specific than the Line Group Usage Report, but it allows you to see at a glance

which line group received the most traffic for a specified time interval. In addition, by comparing
the ATB count with the ATB seconds count, you can determine the average duration of the ATB
condition during a specific period for each line group.
Line Group Usage–Line–Statistics Report

The Line Group Usage–Line–Report shows the number of seconds that individual ports in a line
group are busy and how many calls each port receives over a specified reporting period. You can
choose to display the data for a single line group or for a range of line groups. The reporting
period can be any hour, or range of hours, from the current day or portions of the most recent
seven days.
You can choose to run either a full report, which gives the statistics in 15-minute increments for
each hour of the reporting period, or a summary report, which shows the average line group
usage for each hour. Figure 12-2 provides an excerpt from a sample Line Group Usage–Line–
Report.
To Run the Line Group Usage–Line–Report

1. Enter G for Group Usage–Line from the Statistics Menu.
The system displays the Line Group Usage Report Menu.
LINE GROUP USAGE REPORT MENU
(A) Beginning Hour (0 - 23) = [8]
(B) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]
(C) Beginning Group Number (1 - 24) = [1]
(D) Ending Group Number (1 - 24) = [24]
(F) Ending Day (0 - 6) = [5]
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Enter A to select the time interval for the data to display.

Enter the first hour of the time period to report
(0 = midnight; 12 = noon).
Enter B, then enter the last hour of the time period.

3. Choose the group, or range of groups, to report:
Enter C and the number of the first group in the range to report.
Enter D and the number of the last group in the range to report.
Leave C and D at the default settings to report all groups.
Enter the same group number for both C and D to report only one group.
The system retains statistical data from 12:00 midnight of the previous day.

Option E allows you to choose today’s information or yesterday’s data (the default setting is Monday).
Enter F to choose the ending day.

5. Enter the report destination to begin the report.
Figure 12-2 Sample Standard Line Group Usage-Line-Report
Reading the Line Group Usage–Line–Report

The first line of the report shows the date and time interval when the data were gathered.
GROUP
The lines belong to Line Group 1.
LINE 1:0:3 HOUR = 14

The data displayed immediately below refers to the triplet 1:0:3 (module 1, slot 0, port 3) for the
time period between 2 p.m. and 3 p.m. Entry 00-14 indicates that data in the column were
gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour; 15-29 refers to the second 15-minutes of the
hour; 30-44 refers to the third 15 minutes of the hour; 45-59 refers to the final 15-minutes of the
hour.
TOTAL
The data for the four 15-minute intervals. When a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value,
it means that data have not been gathered.
EXAMPLE: If the report is run at 3:30 p.m., and the report interval is for hours 12 - 15 (noon to 3 p.m.), the
entries for hour 15 (3 p.m. to 4 p.m.) show hyphens.
USAGE
The percentage of the hour the line was busy.
EXAMPLE: Line 1:0:0 was busy for 300 seconds out of 3600 or for 8% of the time between
2 p.m. and 3 p.m.
SECONDS
The total number of seconds that the line was busy during the time period.
CALLS
The number of calls that were received by the line during the time period.
Reading the Line Group Usage–Line–Summary Report

The summary report displays the line groups by number and gives the total number of seconds
and the total number of times that a line in that line group was used during the entire period
reported. This report is less specific than the standard report, but it allows you to see at a glance
which line group receives the most traffic during the specified time interval.

Line Usage Statistics Report

The Line Usage Report shows the number of seconds that individual ports were busy and how
many calls each line received over a specified reporting period. You can choose to display the
data for a single line or for a range of line numbers. The reporting period can be any hour, or
range of hours, from the current day or from portions of the most recent seven days.
Figure 12-3 shows an excerpt from a sample Standard Line Usage Report.
To Run the Line Usage Report

1. Enter L for Line Usage from the Statistics Menu.
The system displays the Line Usage Report Menu.
LINE USAGE REPORT MENU
(A) Add Lines to Report
(B) Drop Lines to Report
(C) Show Lines to Report
(D) Beginning Hour (0 - 23) = [8]
(E) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]
(F) Beginning Day (0 - 6) = [1]
(G) Ending Day (0 6) = [5]
(H) Summary = [N]
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Choose the line or range of lines to report:

The system lists the phoneline exceptions by line or reports "all parameters set to defaults".
The system prompts, "triplets to report"
Enter A and the number of the first line in the range to report.
Enter B and the number of the last line in the range to report.
Leave A and B at the default settings to report all lines.
Enter the same group number for both A and B to report only one line.
The actual triplet (line number) is used to define the line:
Line number range: <module>:<slot>:<port>-<module>:<slot>:<port>.
Wild card entry * (all lines all modules), or <module>:* (all lines on <module>),
or <module>:<slot>:* (all ports on <module>:<slot>).
Enter multiple values, as described, separated by commas.
For a discussion of triplets, see Step 2: Define Line Group in Offline Menu.
3. Enter D to select the time interval for the data to display.

Enter the first hour of the time period to report.

(0 = midnight; 12 = noon.)
Enter E, then enter the last hour of the time period.
Options E and F allow you to choose the day(s) of the week.
The Standard Line Usage Report displays data for each line, in 15-minute increments, for
each hour of the chosen interval. The Line Usage Summary Report shows a single value for
each line.
Figure 12-3 Sample Standard Line Usage Report
Reading the Standard Line Usage Report

The first line of the report shows the date and time interval during which the data were gathered.
DAY = 01 LINE = 1:3:0

The data displayed immediately below refer to the triplet 1:3:0 (module 1, slot 3, port 0), on
Monday. Entry 00-14 indicates that data in the column were gathered during the first 15-minutes
of the hour; 15-29 refers to the second 15-minutes of the hour; 30-44 refers to the third 15-
minutes of the hour; 45-59 refers to the final 15-minutes of the hour.
TOTAL
The data for the four 15-minute intervals. If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value, it
means that the data have not been gathered.
EXAMPLE: If the report is run at 3:30 p.m., and the report interval is for hours 12-15 (noon to 3 p.m.), the
entries for hour 15 (3 to 4 p.m.) show hyphens.
USAGE
The percentage of the hour the line was busy.
SECONDS
The total number of seconds that the line was busy during the time period.
CALLS
The number of calls received by the line during the time period.
HIGHEST USAGE
The greatest total amount of time that the line was busy in a single 15-minute interval of the
reporting period.
LOWEST USAGE

The least total amount of time that the line was busy in a single 15-minute interval of the reporting
period. This period has the slowest traffic for the line during the interval reported.
Reading the Line Usage Summary Report

The Line Usage Summary Report displays the ports by triplet, gives the total number of seconds
that each line is busy, and the total number of calls that each line receives during the entire report
period. The summary report is less specific than the standard report, but it allows you to see at a
glance which line receives the most traffic for the specified time interval. In addition, by comparing
the number of seconds that a port is busy with the number of calls that the line receives, you can
determine the average duration of a call during this period for each port.
Mailbox Statistics Reports

Mailbox usage statistics reports are available through both the Mailbox Maintenance Menu and
the Mailbox Statistics Menu.
The Mailbox Maintenance Menu (select M from the Main Menu) offers the following reports:
• Mailbox Data Inquiry Report
• Mailbox Block Inquiry Report
• Mailbox Dump Report
The Mailbox Statistics Menu (select R from the Statistics Menu) offers three reports that provide
summary "snapshots" of current mailbox usage and speech storage.
• Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report
• Idle Mailboxes Report
• Mailbox Totals Report
These reports are discussed in this section.
Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report

The Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report summarizes account (mailbox) statistics and
speech statistics for all mailboxes in the system. Speech storage is used for messages, names,
and greetings. Figure 12-4 shows a sample Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report.
To Run the Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report

1. Enter R to access the Reports Menu from the Main Menu.
2. Enter S to access the Statistics Menu.
3. Enter R for Mailbox Statistics Menu.
4. Enter B for Total Speech Account Breakdown.
The system prompts you to choose a destination for the report.
The system displays, saves, or prints account statistics, speech statistics, and a summary of
message statistics.

Figure 12-4 Sample Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report
Idle Mailboxes Report

The Idle Mailboxes Report
• Shows mailbox numbers that are not logged into by their owners
• Summarizes mailbox usage statistics
• Lists FCOS, LCOS, and department codes assigned to idle mailboxes
• Shows the number of mailboxes that are logged into or that receive messages as "Mailboxes
with Activity"
Figure 12-5 shows a sample Idle Mailbox Report.
To Run the Idle Mailboxes Report

3. Enter R to access the Mailbox Statistics Menu.
4. Enter I for Idle Mailboxes.
The system displays, saves, or prints numbers, FCOS, LCOS, and department codes of all
idle mailboxes. The report summarizes idle mailbox activity.
Figure 12-5 Sample Idle Mailbox Report
Mailbox Totals Report

The Mailbox Totals Report gives the same type of information as the Idle Mailboxes Report;
however, it reports all mailboxes on the system. The "Mailboxes with Activity" entry shows the
number of mailboxes that are logged into or that receive messages.
To Run the Mailbox Totals Report

3. Enter R to access the Mailbox Statistics Menu.
4. Enter M for Mailbox Totals Report.
The system displays, saves, or prints numbers of all mailboxes, FCOS, LCOS and
department codes assigned to mailboxes. It summarizes mailbox activity.

Message Counts Usage Statistics Report

The Message (Counts) Usage Report shows the number of messages received, the number of
messages still available, and the percentage of message storage available in a specified
reporting period.
The reporting period can be any hour or range of hours in the current day or portions of the most
recent seven days. You can chose to run either a full report, which gives the statistics in 15-
minute increments for each hour of the reporting period, or a summary report, which shows the
average message usage for each hour. Figure 12-6 shows an excerpt from a sample Standard
Message Counts Usage Report.
To Run the Message Counts Usage Report

1. Enter M for Message Counts Usage from the Statistics Menu.
The system displays the Message Usage Report Menu.
MESSAGE USAGE REPORT MENU

(B) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]
(C) Beginning Day (0 - 6) = [1]
(D) Ending Day (0 - 6) = [5]
(E) Summary = [N}
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Enter A to select the time interval for the data to display.

Enter the first hour of the time period that you want to report. (0 = midnight; 12 = noon.)
Enter B and the last hour of the time period.
Options C and D allow you to choose the day(s) of the week.
The standard Message Usage Report displays data for each hour of the chosen interval in
15-minute increments. The Message Usage Summary Report shows a single value for each
hour.
Reading the Standard Message Counts Usage Report

The first line of the report shows the date and time interval that the data were gathered and the
total number of messages received during that time period. This line is repeated for each day of

the report.
MESSAGE HOUR = 07
The data displayed immediately below were gathered during the hour between 7 and 8 a.m. Entry
00-14 indicates that data in the column were gathered during the first 15-minutes of the hour; 15-
29 refers to the second 15-minutes of the hour; 30-44 refers to the third 15-minutes of the hour;
45-59 refers to the final 15-minutes of the hour. The report covers data hourly.
AVERAGE
The average value for the four 15-minute samples. If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical
value, it means that data have not been gathered.
MESSAGE FREE
The number of messages not in use at the time of sampling.
PERCENT USED
The number of messages in use, as a percentage of the maximum number of messages allowed
on the system.
Reading the Message Counts Usage Summary Report

The summary report displays, by day and by hour
• Total number of messages used
• Total number of messages available
• Percentage of message storage used
The summary report is less specific than the standard report, but it allows you to easily determine
the hours when message storage is at its peak and the hours with low message storage.
You can use the report to detail the hours immediately before and after midnight in order to judge
the effectiveness of the automatic purge.
EXAMPLE: If message storage is near or above 80% on a regular basis, the LCOS of most mailboxes on
the system should be adjusted to give these mailboxes a shorter message retention time. This
makes the purge more effective, and frees message storage more quickly.
As an alternative, the maximum number of messages and maximum message length

parameters can be decreased for as many system LCOS as is feasible.
Speech Blocks Usage Statistics Report

Each system has a maximum number of storage units available on the hard disk. The number of
speech storage units, called "speech blocks", depends on the storage hour capacity of the hard
disk. Messages, mailbox names and greetings, prompts, and distribution list names consume
speech storage blocks.
The Speech Blocks Usage Report shows the following information for a specified reporting
period:
• Maximum number of speech blocks for your system
• Number of blocks in use

• Percentage of message storage available
The reporting period can be any hour or range of hours from the current day or from portions of
the most recent seven days. You can choose to run either a full report, which gives the statistics
in 15-minute increments for each hour of the reporting period, or a summary report, which shows
the average speech blocks usage for each hour. Figure 12-7 shows the Standard Speech Blocks
Usage Report.
To Run the Speech Blocks Usage Report

1. Enter S for Speech Blocks Usage from the Statistics Menu.
The system displays the Speech Blocks Usage Report Menu.
SPEECH BLOCKS USAGE REPORT MENU
(B) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]
(D) Ending Day (0 - 6) = [5]
(E) Summary = [N]
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Enter A to select the time interval for the data to be displayed.

The standard Speech Blocks Usage Report displays data for each hour of the chosen
interval, in 15-minute increments. The Speech Blocks Usage Summary Report shows a
single value for each hour.
Figure 12-7 Sample Standard Speech Blocks Usage Report
Reading the Standard Speech Blocks Usage Report

The first line of the report shows the date and time interval when data were gathered and the
maximum number of available speech storage blocks on the system
(Max Speech Blks). This line is repeated for each day of the report.
SPEECH HOUR = 08
The data displayed immediately below was gathered during the hour between 8 a.m. and 9 a.m.
A column entry of 00-14 indicates data were gathered during the first 15-minutes of the hour; an

entry of 15-29 refers to the second 15-minutes of the hour; 30-44 refers to the third 15-minutes of
the hour; 45-59 refers to the final 15-minutes of the hour.
AVERAGE
The average value of the four 15-minute samples. If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical
value, it means that the data have not yet been gathered.
BLOCKS FREE
The number of speech blocks not in use at the time of sampling.
PERCENT USED
The number of speech blocks in use, as a percentage of the maximum number of speech blocks
allowed on the system.
Reading the Speech Blocks Usage Summary Report

The summary report displays the number of speech blocks used, the number that are free, and
the percentage of speech storage used for each hour. The summary report is less specific than
the standard report, but it allows you to determine the hours when speech storage is at its peak.
The report also indicates the hours that have low speech storage.
To obtain an accurate picture of message and non-message related speech storage, the results
of this report can be compared with the results of the Message Usage Report.
If names and greetings consume a large percentage of speech storage and leave too little
storage for transient messages, you have the following options:
(a) Decrease the maximum greeting length allowed in the LCOS for that system
(b) Limit the recording of names for certain FCOS
(c) Perform both (a) and (b)
Fax Group Usage Statistics Report

The Fax Group Usage Report shows statistics for NuPoint Fax groups. A NuPoint Fax group is a
set of fax ports on the same MVIP bus. Line groups can be assigned to a NuPoint Fax group so
the fax resources are shared.
The report shows

• Transactions
• Use
• Resources
• Busy line information
Figure 12-8 shows the Standard Fax Group Usage Report.
To Run the Fax Group Usage Report

1. Enter F for Fax Group Usage from the Statistics Menu.
The system displays the Fax Group Usage Report Menu.

FAX GROUP USAGE REPORT MENU
(A) Beginning Group (1 - 42) = [1]
(B) Ending Group (1 - 42) = [42]
(C) Beginning Hour (0 - 23) = [8]
(D) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]
(F) Ending Day (0 - 6) = [5]
(G) Summary = [N]
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Choose the group to report:
Enter A for beginning group, and enter a fax group number between 1 and 42.
Enter B for ending group, and enter a fax group number between 1 and 42.
To report only one group, enter the same group number for both A and B.
3. Select the time interval for the report:
Enter C for beginning hour.
Enter the number of the first hour of the time period for the report.
The default is 8 (8 a.m.). The range is 0 (zero) to 23 hours.

0 = midnight, 12 = noon, and 23 = 11:00 p.m.
Enter D for ending hour.
Enter the number of the last hour of the time period

for the report.
The default is 17 (5 p.m.). The range is 0 to 23 hours.

4. Select the day(s) for the report:
Enter E for beginning day.
Enter the number of the first day of the period for the report. Sunday = 0, Monday = 1, Tuesday =
2,... Saturday = 6.
The default is 1 (Monday).
Enter F for ending day.
Enter the number of the last day of the period for the report.
The default is 5 (Friday).

5. Specify whether you want the report in summary or detail form:
Enter G for summary.
Enter Y to run a summary report, or

Enter N to run a standard report with details in 15-minute intervals.

7. Select the report destination:
C to send the report to the console.
F to send the report to a file (you are prompted for a file name).
The system sends the report to the output device you select.
Figure 12-8 Sample Fax Group Usage Report
Reading the Fax Group Usage Report

The first line shows the date and time interval when the data were gathered. This line is repeated
for each day of the report.
DAY=04 HOUR=08
The data displayed immediately below refer to Thursday 8 a.m. Entry 00-14 indicates that data in
the column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour; 15-29 refers to the second
15-minutes of the hour; 30-44 refers to the third 15-minutes of the hour; 45-59 refers to the final
15-minutes of the hour.
TRANSACTIONS
The number of requests for fax connections during the time intervals that used a NuPoint Fax
resource. A transaction that starts during one interval and ends in another is counted in the
starting interval only. However, the TOTAL USE and ATB SECONDS fields accumulate for their
respective intervals.
TOTAL USE
The number of seconds that fax resources are used during the interval.
NO RESOURCE COUNT
The number of times a transaction is not completed because fax resources are not available.
ATB SECONDS
The total number of seconds in the time period that an ATB (All Trunks Busy) condition occurred
on the lines in the fax group.
ATB COUNT
The number of times that an ATB condition occurred on the lines in the fax group. The counter is
incremented when an ATB condition first occurs. The ATB condition must clear and reoccur
before the counter is incremented again.
Reading the Fax Group Usage Summary Report

The Fax Group Usage Summary Report displays the
• Number of transactions for the interval specified
• Total seconds of use
• Number of times no fax resource was available
- ATB condition occurred on lines in the fax group

The summary report is less specific than the standard report, but it allows you to easily determine
the hours when fax usage is at its peak. You can use this report to reassign the fax groups based
on any imbalances you find.
Complete Summary Report

The Complete Summary Report is also known as the Total Statistics Summary Report. The report
provides information for the previous week, in Sunday-to-Saturday order, and shows total
statistics for items such as
• Message counts
• Speech blocks
• Fax transactions
• Network usage
• Amount of storage capacity consumed on the hard disk
• Amount of storage capacity available on the hard disk.
Figure 12-9 shows a sample Complete Summary Report.
To Run the Complete Summary Report

1. Enter C for Complete Summary Report from the Statistics Menu.
The system displays the output and returns to the Statistics Menu.
Figure 12-9 Sample Complete Summary Report
Reading the Complete Summary Report

The Complete Summary Report entries have the following meanings:
Each day of the week has a banner with the day name, the date, and the date of the last system
reset.
TOTAL MESSAGES
The number of messages available on the system.
LOWEST MESSAGES FREE

The lowest number of messages that are not in use that day (system checks every fifteen
minutes).
TOTAL SPEECH
The number of speech blocks available on the system.
LOWEST SPEECH FREE

The lowest number of speech blocks that are not in use that day (system checks every fifteen
minutes).

TOTAL CALLS
The number of calls processed by the system.
TOTAL SECONDS
The number of seconds that the ports are busy.
LINE ATB COUNT

The number of times that an ATB condition occurs in a line group.
LINE ATB SECONDS

The total number of seconds the entire line group is busy.
FAX TRANS
The number of fax transactions processed by the system.
FAX TOTAL SECONDS

The number of seconds fax transactions (FAX TRANS) required to process.
FAX ATB COUNT

The number of times that an ATB condition occurred on fax ports organized into fax groups.
FAX ATB SECONDS

The total number of seconds that the ATB condition
(FAX ATB COUNT) is in effect.
FAX NO RES CNT

The number of fax transactions that are not processed because fax resources are not available.
NETWORKING MESSAGES
The peak and total amounts for network delivery of messages (NP Net) in both regular and urgent
queues. Numbers indicate peak times and daily totals.
Total System Statistics Report

The Total System Statistics Report shows the amount of storage capacity consumed on the hard
disk and the amount available. Figure 12-10 shows a sample report.
To Run the Total System Statistics Report

1. Enter T for Total System Statistics from the Statistics Menu.
The system prompts you to enter a destination for the report.
Figure 12-10 Sample Total System Statistics Report
Reading the Total System Statistics Report

System Statistics entries have the following meanings:

MESSAGE NUMBERS
The links between the messages, greetings, and names associated with mailboxes and the
mailboxes themselves. Each message, name, or greeting uses one message number.
SPEECH BLOCKS
All speech recorded through the telephone in the form of messages, comments, greetings, list
names, and names. Approximately 2.2 seconds of speech consume one speech block.
ACCOUNT SECTORS
All mailbox and system information, including users’ mailbox numbers, distribution lists,
passcodes, and any line with phoneline exceptions.
PROMPTS
Lists each set of prompts loaded on your system and the amount of space used, in both hard
drive sectors and speech blocks. Use this data to determine whether you have space for
additional prompts.
Virtual Drive Statistics Report

The Virtual Drive Statistics Report shows the amount of storage capacity consumed on each of
the drive partitions and the amount available. Hard disks in the system are partitioned into
multiple logical, or virtual drives.
The report fields are the same as the Total System Statistics Report. A sample Virtual Drive
Statistics Report is provided in Figure 12-11.
To Run the Virtual Drive Statistics Report

1. Enter V for Virtual Drive Statistics from the Statistics Menu.
Figure 12-11 Sample Virtual Drive Statistics Report
Network Usage Statistics Report

The Network Usage Report gives 15-minute "snapshots" of network message activity for a
specified reporting period. This period can be any hour or range of hours from the current day or
the previous six days. Figure 12-12 shows a sample Standard Network Usage Report.
To Run the Network Usage Report

1. Enter N for Network Statistics from the Statistics Menu (not the Network Reports Menu).
The system displays the Network Usage Report Menu.
NETWORK USAGE REPORT MENU
(B) Ending Hour (0 - 23) = [17]

(D) Ending Day (0 - 6) = [5]
(E) Summary = [N]
(R) Run Report
(X) Exit
2. Enter A to select the time interval for the data to be displayed.


Figure 12-12 Sample Standard Network Usage Report
Reading the Standard Network Usage Report

In the sample report, the heading shows the node name, the report name, the date, and the time
that the report was run.
The first line shows the date and time interval when the data were gathered.
HYPHEN (-)
(In any column) indicates that the system was not processing messages during the report period
(for example, during a power failure or when the system was taken offline for maintenance). A 0
(zero) in any column means the system was operable, but there was no activity.
MESSAGE DAY = 03, HOUR = 08

Indicates that the data displayed immediately below were gathered on Wednesday, during the
hour between 8 a.m. and 10 a.m. Entry 00-14 indicates that data in the column were gathered
during the first 15-minutes of the hour; 15-29 refers to the second 15-minutes of the hour; 30-44
refers to the third 15-minutes of the hour; 45-59 refers to the last 15-minutes of the hour.
AVERAGE
The average value of the four 15-minute samples. If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical
value, it means that the data have not been gathered.
EXAMPLE: If the report is run at 3:30 p.m., and the report interval is for hours 12-15 (noon
to 3 p.m.) of the same day, the entries for hour 15 (3 p.m. to 4 p.m.) will be hyphens.
BATCH IN QUEUE
The total number of batch (non-urgent) messages and receipt updates present in the network
queue during the time period.
URG IN QUEUE
The total number of urgent messages in the network queue during the time period.

BATCH MAX LENGTH
The total number of minutes of recorded speech in the network batch queue during the time
period.
URG MAX LENGTH

The total number of minutes of recorded speech in the urgent network queue during the time
period.
BATCH LATENCY
The maximum number of seconds that a message remained in the batch network queue during
the time period.
URG LATENCY
The maximum number of seconds that a message remained in the urgent network queue during
the time period.
BATCH DELIVERED
The total number of batch messages delivered to their destination nodes during the time period.
(Receipt updates do not count.)
URG DELIVERED
The total number of urgent messages delivered to their destination nodes during the time period.
TOTAL UNDELIVERED
The total number of messages (batch and urgent) rejected by their destination nodes during the
time period. (Receipt updates do not count.)
The Network Usage Summary Report

The Network Usage Summary Report gives peak (maximum) and total statistics for network
message activity during a specified reporting period.
PEAKS
Statistics for maximum activity during the reporting period. Although separate statistics are kept
for batch and urgent message queues, these statistics are not broken down by destination node.
In other words, urgent queue statistics refer to urgent messages accumulated for every node on
the network.
13 Billing Reports
The system generates four billing reports. Each report provides the charges for individual
mailboxes by statistic, then calculates the total amount due. Each report serves a different
purpose.
• Billing Reports are the standard reports, usually run monthly.

• Mailbox Blocked Reports (Blocked Billing Reports) retain a special format and are usually
sent out to other databases via the serial port.
• Previous Billing Reports are run when a copy of the Billing Report from the last billing
cycle is desired, or when a problem occurs during the "Gather" step of the billing procedure.
(“Step 2: Perform a Gather”.)

• Termination Reports are run when a mailbox is checked out and deleted, or when paging
service is discontinued during a billing cycle.
This chapter outlines the steps involved to generate a Billing Report and provides instructions on
how to run the Mailbox Blocked, Previous Billing, and Termination Reports.
To reach the Billing Menu, enter B from the Reports Menu (select R from the Main Menu).
BILLING
(A) Adjust Rates
(B) Billing Report
(G) Gather Data
(M) Mailbox Blocked Report
(P) Previous Billing Report
(T) Termination Report
(X) Exit
Step 1: Set Billing Rates

During day-to-day system operation, 120 different statistics are kept for each mailbox, including
mailbox access counters, message counters, connect time accumulators, disk usage
accumulation, and page counter. For each statistic, different rates can be set for high and low
usage, and for a boundary. This tiered rate system gives the option to charge set rates or to give
volume discounts.
• Low usage rate is the rate charged, up to the boundary number. A 0 (zero) prevents this
rate from appearing on the Billing Report.
• High usage rate is the rate charged after the boundary number is reached. If you want to
use this rate, be sure to enter a boundary.
• Boundary is where the rate changes from the low usage rate to the high usage rate. A 0
(zero) means all usage is charged at the low rate.
If you need to enter new billing rates or adjust existing rates the system’s various counters and
accumulators determine the charges. A different billing rate can be set for each resource counter.
To Set Billing Rates for Each Counter

1. Enter B to access the Billing Menu from the Reports Menu.
2. Enter A to access the Adjust Billing Rates Menu from the Billing Menu.
BILLING RATES
(A) Mailbox Accesses
(B) Base Rates
(C) Connect Time
(D) Disk Usage
(M) Messages Received
(N) Network Rates
(P) Pager Calls
(R) Report Rates
(X) Exit
3. Enter the letter(s) of the billing resource(s) that you want to change.

With the exception of Base rates, which are flat fees, you can enter a separate high and low
usage rate, along with a boundary rate, for each resource (see explanation).
To give volume discounts, enter a lower amount for the high usage rate than for the low
usage rate. To penalize heavy usage, enter a higher amount for the high usage rate.
Boundary values are charged at the lower rate. Each boundary value is set in the same unit
as the individual resource. To charge a standard rate, enter 0 (zero) in the boundary number
field.
To Generate a Report of the Current Rates

You can obtain a report of the current rates for each resource from the Report Billing Rates
Menu.

2. Enter A to access the Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
3. Enter R to access the Report Billing Rates Menu.
REPORT BILLING RATES
(B) Base Rates
(C) Caller Connect Rates
(G) Greeting Rates
(L) Login Rates
(N) Network Rates
(O) Other Rates
(P) Pager Calls
(U) User Connect Rates
(X) Exit
4. Select the desired option(s) for the statistics you want to check.
The system displays corresponding rates.
Billing Resource Counters

Each mailbox has resource counters. The billing system allows you to charge a base rate and set
two-tiered separate rates for each counter, if desired.
Base Rates
A base rate is a flat fee charged at every billing period. The system prompts you to set a base
rate for each FCOS. The rate set for any FCOS can be any value between $0.00 and $327.67,
precise to $0.01; it can be prorated for a portion of the billing cycle.
1. Enter B for Base Rates from the Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
The system prompts:
Which FCOS base rate to change? (1 - 640) [<CR> for all or ? for help]
2. Enter the FCOS rate to change. Select:
a to enter all numbers
e to enter even numbers
o to enter odd numbers
l to enter the lower half

u to enter the upper half
y-x to enter a range
x,y,...,z to enter individual numbers
x to enter a single number
Enter the base rate for each or leave the value as displayed.
Mailbox Accesses
There are two different mailbox access counters: (a) login rates, and (b) greeting rates. Although
each mailbox has mailbox access counters, these counters are designed specifically for billing
Information-only mailboxes. Information-only mailboxes have FCOS that do not allow them to
receive messages (for example, chain and greeting-only mailboxes).
Other resource counters that may be incremented for Information-only mailboxes are the user
connect time and the caller connect time. A base rate can also be set.
u Login Rates Counters
Login rates counters track the number of times the user logs into the mailbox. A different rate may
exist for each port or line group on the system.
1. Enter R to access the Report Billing Rates Menu from the Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
2. Enter L for Login Rates.
The system lists rates for mailbox access by port group (low rate, boundary, high rate).
u Greeting Rates Counters
Greeting rates counters track the number of times that the mailbox greeting plays (that is, the
number of times that the mailbox is accessed by an outside caller). A different rate may exist for
each port or line group on the system.
• The caller does not have to listen to the entire greeting for this counter to be incremented.
2. Enter G for Greeting Rates.
The system lists rates for mailbox access by port group (low rate, boundary, high rate).
Connect Time
Two connect time accumulators measure phone line usage (off-hook to on-hook).
u User Connect Rates
User connect rates measure the time used by the mailbox owner to pick up messages and make
messages for other users. A different rate may exist for each port or line group on the system.
2. Enter U for User connect rates.
u Caller Connect Rates

Caller connect rates measure the time charged when outside callers leave messages in a
mailbox, or listen to the greeting of an Information-only mailbox.
• Counter is not incremented when a message is left by a TAS (Telephone Answering Service)
operator using the Message Attendant application.
There is no way to associate TAS operator time with any particular mailbox—other than by
the number of messages left by TAS operators. (See Chapter 10, "Special TAS
Considerations.")
• Different rates may exist for each port or line group on the system.
2. Enter C for Caller connect rates.
The system lists the connect time rates by port group (low rate, boundary, high rate).
u Measurement Method and Limitations of the "Connect Time" Counter
Connect time is measured in tenths of minutes (6 seconds), rounded up if not exact. Each
counter allows 109 hours—about 3.5 hours per day for a month—before the accumulator restarts
at zero.
u Calculation of Charges
When charges are calculated, they are based on minutes of connect time (rather than tenths of a
minute). This calculation allows rates (which are in mils) to be adjusted by small amounts.
Disk Usage
Disk usage is the size of the message, multiplied by the length of time the message stays on the
system.
1. Enter D for Disk Usage from the Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
The system prompts you to enter low usage rate, low/high boundary, high usage rate.
2. Enter an amount in the range of $0.00 to $64.999, for low, or high usage rate.
For the low/high boundary, enter the boundary at which the rate will change from the low
usage rate to the high usage rate. (Valid range is 0 to 65535.)
The system prompts you to enter Fax disk use rates.

For the low/high boundary, enter the boundary at which the rate will change from the low
usage rate to the high usage rate. (Valid range is 0 to 65535.)
u Measurement Method and Limitations of the "Disk Usage" Accumulator
Time on disk is measured in hours rounded up to the next hour, and is calculated when the
message is deleted from the system. The disk usage accumulator resets to zero after 16,777,215
units of usage—equivalent to keeping three hours of speech for one year.
u Calculation of Charges

Users typically accumulate several thousand units of disk usage per month, unless they delete
messages immediately after they are received. If the rate is applied to the usage as accumulated,
a rate of $.001 would be a significant charge, and the only way the rate could change would be to
double it. Therefore, when charges are calculated, disk usage values are divided by one hundred,
and the rate is specified to the nearest mil-per-minute of speech kept for 10 hours.
• Users are not billed for messages not deleted at the time billing data is gathered.
These messages will eventually be deleted, however, and the charges will increase, because
the time on the disk will have increased.
• Disk usage for names or greetings is not accumulated.
Charges for these can be included in the base rates.

• If a message is made with a distribution list, each mailbox receiving the message is charged
for it.
• If a user sends a message with comments to another user, the sender is charged for the
original message for as long as it remains on the system.
The recipient is charged disk usage for both the original message and for the comments until
each is deleted from the mailboxes.
Messages Received
Every time a message is left in a mailbox, a counter is incremented for that mailbox.
• Enter M for Messages Received from Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
u User Messages Counters
User messages counters are incremented in two ways:

(a) When a caller phones his or her own mailbox and "makes" a message for another mailbox,
the recipient’s mailbox counter increases.
(b) When a user "gives" a message with comments to another mailbox, the recipient’s mailbox
counter increases by one (message plus comments are counted as one message).
u Caller Messages Counters
Caller messages counters are incremented in several ways:

(a) When a caller phones into the system directly and leaves a message.
(b) When a caller leaves a message in the attendant’s mailbox and the attendant forwards the
message.
(c) When a greeting is delivered for a Greeting-only mailbox.
- Including times when the mailbox owner logs into his mailbox by pressing
the * key (star) while the greeting is playing.
(d) When a caller phones into the system directly and leaves an urgent message.
(e) When a caller phones into the system directly and requests a receipt response.
u TAS Operator Messages Counters
TAS operator messages counters increase when a TAS operator leaves a message via one of

the open ports set up by the Message Attendant application.
u Limits of the "Messages Received" counter
Each message counter can accumulate up to 4,095 messages—132 messages per day for a
month—before it resets to zero.
Pager Calls
Each time a successful page is issued, a counter is incremented in the mailbox.
However, this does not necessarily correspond to the number of messages received.
• If two messages are received at the same time, only one page is made.
- If a message is not picked up within the set pager interval (a selected amount of time
programmed when the mailbox was created), the system re-pages.
- If the mailbox pager frequency (programmed when the mailbox was created) is greater
than one, every re-page is counted as a separate page.
Pager call rates are set by the Pager System, not by an individual pager. Pagers with the same
pager outdial index (also known as the access code index) belong to the same pager system.
Refer to Chapter 5, "Pagers and Message Delivery," for more information.
• Enter P for Pager Calls from the Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
u Adjusting Pager Call Rates in Mid-cycle
The rate at which a page is billed depends on the pager outdial index—representing the pager
system access code—programmed into the mailbox at the time the "Gather" is performed, and
not the rate present at the time the page is made.
• If the pager outdial index or the billing rate are changed in the middle of the billing period, all
pages accumulated during the billing period are billed at the new rate.
u Termination of Paging
When paging service is discontinued in the middle of the billing period, an outdial index does not
appear in the mailbox at the time of billing. Therefore, no pages are billed even if some have
accumulated.
• To avoid this situation, run a Termination Report before modifying the mailbox. This report
calculates the amount due without changing statistics in the mailbox. Other charges are
corrected at the regular billing. To run the Termination Report.
Network Rates
Billing rates can be set for network usage, including
u Network Message Counters

• messages sent; urgent messages sent
• network nodes sent to; network nodes sent urgent to
• recipients sent to; recipients sent urgent to

• messages received; urgent messages received
u Network Message Length Counters

• messages sent; urgent messages sent
• messages received; urgent messages received
• network nodes sent; network nodes sent urgent
• remote recipients sent to; remote recipients sent urgent to
To set billing rates for network usage, perform the following actions:
1. Enter N for Network Rates from the Adjust Billing Rates Menu.
The system prompts you to enter new rates for the counters (as listed above):
Network messages sent:
For low/high boundary, enter the boundary at which the rate will change from the low usage
rate to the high usage rate. (Valid range is 0 to 65535.)
3. Continue by entering rates for the remaining counters.
Step 2: Perform a Gather

Before the system can bill mailboxes, it must gather data from all mailbox counters. Gather is a
three-step process that provides the following data:
• Step 1: The current billing data file, which was created during the last Gather, becomes
the new previous billing data file.
This step overwrites (and thus destroys) the old previous billing data file, also created during the
last Gather; the system issues a warning.
• Step 2: The system scans the counters and accumulators in all mailboxes. The data collected
becomes the new current billing data file.
• Step 3: The data gathered in Step 2 is subtracted from the mailbox counters.
This update zeros the counters in all mailboxes to prepare them for the next billing cycle
(unless mailbox activity occurs between Steps 2 and 3).
While the billing report is running,
(a) The value obtained during the Gather for each counter in a mailbox is multiplied by the billing
resource rate you assigned to that counter.
(b) The system adds charges for all resources with billing rates greater than zero, plus any base
rate you may have specified.
(c) A total charge for each mailbox is provided.
To Run a Single Gather

1. Enter B for the Billing Menu from the Reports Menu.
2. Enter G to perform a Gather.
The system displays the date of the last Gather, and responds:

Warning!! This will destroy previous billing data.
Type "gather" if you really want to do this.
3. Type gather; or
Press <Enter> to cancel.
The system displays status messages:
Please wait...gathering data
gathering complete
starting update
<number> mailboxes updated.
Note: If you did not receive both gathering complete and <number> mailboxes updated prompts,
see the section titled “If Gather Fails”.
When the system displays the number of mailboxes updated:

• Gather is complete
• Counts of all statistics are set to zero (0)
• Any billing report you obtain is current, as of this Gather
The Gather process can be initiated from the Billing Menu, or the system can be configured to run
a Gather automatically (see "Auto Gather," in the next section).
Auto Gather
Auto Gather allows the system to be configured to automatically perform weekly, monthly, or
bimonthly gathers. Auto Gather follows the same process as the Gather sequence described in
“Step 2: Perform a Gather”.
To Configure an Auto Gather

Note: This procedure makes changes to the inactive configuration. You must activate the inactive
configuration for the changes to take effect. See “Process to Activate the Inactive Configuration”.
Auto Gather is programmed from the Auto Gather configuration menu.
1. Enter S to access the System Maintenance Menu from the Main Menu.
2. Enter R for Reconfiguration.
The System Configuration Menu is displayed.
3. Enter R to reconfigure the system.
The Configuration Main Menu is displayed.
4. Enter G for Offline Configuration.
The Offline Configuration Menu is displayed.
CAUTION: Offline configuration entries should be made on a duplicate of the active

configuration so you can easily check entries and correct them, if
necessary, before activating the configuration.
5. Enter B to Duplicate Active Configuration.

The system copies the current (active) configuration and displays the short version of the

Offline Menu after copying is complete.
Note: Steps 6 through 10 and additional configuration entries affect only the copy; entries take effect only
after you activate the configuration.
6. Enter S for Auto Gather - System Billing.

The system displays the Auto Gather Menu.
AUTO GATHER
(E) Enable Auto Gather (Weekly/Monthly/No) (W/M/N) = [M]
(R) Run Mailbox Statistics Report (y/n) = [ ]
(W) Weekly Gather Menu
(M) Monthly Gather Menu
(S) Show Auto Gather Settings
(X) Exit
7. Enter E.
Auto Gather enabled (weekly/monthly/no) (W/M/N) = [M]
Enter W to enable a weekly Gather; or

Enter M to enable a monthly or twice-monthly Gather; or
Enter N to disable Auto Gather.
Note: On a new system, perform Step 8 before Step 7, because a day must be assigned before enabling
a weekly Auto Gather.
8. Configure an automatic weekly Gather, automatic monthly Gather, or twice-monthly Gather

as described in the sections: "To Configure a Weekly Auto Gather" and "To Configure a
Monthly or Bimonthly Auto Gather".
9. Enter X to Exit.
The system returns to the Offline Menu.
10. Enter X to save changes and return to the Configuration Main Menu.
11. For changes to become effective, enter A to activate the configuration.
(“Process to Activate the Inactive Configuration”.)
To Configure a Weekly Auto Gather

1. Enter W to access the Weekly Gather Menu from the Auto Gather Menu.
WEEKLY GATHER
(D) Day to do Gather (M/T/W/TH/F/S/SU) = [ ]
(H) Hour to Gather (0 - 23) = [0]
(X) Exit
2. Enter D.
Enter the letter(s) to specify which day(s) of the week to gather the information.
3. Enter H.
Enter the number (0 - 23) representing the hour:

0 = midnight, 12 = noon, and 23 = 11 p.m.
4. Enter X to save your settings and return to the Configuration Main Menu.

To Configure a Monthly or Bimonthly Auto Gather
The Monthly Gather Menu allows you to set one or two Gathers per month. The second Auto
Gather can be enabled or disabled from this menu.
1. Enter M to access the Monthly Gather Menu from the Auto Gather Menu.
MONTHLY GATHER
(D) Day of Month to do First Gather (1 - 28) = [1]
(E) Day of Month to do Second Gather (1 - 28) = [ ]
(H) Hour to Gather (0 - 23) = [0]
(S) Second
2. Enter D.
Enter the day (1 - 28) of the month to gather the information for the first Gather.
3. Enter E if you want to perform a bimonthly Gather.
Enter the day (1 - 28) of the month to gather the information for the second Gather.
4. Enter H.
Enter the number (0 - 23) representing the hour to perform (both) the Gather(s):
0 = midnight, 12 = noon, and 23 = 11 p.m.
5. When performing a bimonthly Gather,
Enter S to enable Second Auto Gather.
Enter Y.
6. Enter X to save your settings and return to the Configuration Main Menu.
If Gather Fails
It is possible for a Gather to be unsuccessful. The most likely cause is a power loss during the
process because Gather can take several minutes to complete. If your Gather fails, use the
following procedure to determine your billing:
1. Perform a backup to diskette.
This step saves the previous billing data file created during the unsuccessful Gather. See
“Floppy Backup”.
2. Perform another Gather.
The information needed for the current billing is now divided between the current and
previous billing data files on the hard disk.
3. Run a Previous Billing Report from the diskette.

This report shows what was billed during the last billing cycle and gives a starting point for
determining current charges. See “Previous Billing Report”.
4. Run a Billing Report and a Previous Billing Report from the hard disk.
Manually determine which report has the correct bill for each mailbox.

Step 3: Run the Billing Report
The Billing Report is usually run monthly, but can be run as many times as you wish during a
single billing cycle. As long as a new Gather is not performed, adjusting rates or generating the
report does not change mailbox data. If you find errors in rates after the report is run, adjust the
rates, then run the report again (but omit the Gather). Charges are based on the rates that are in
effect at the time that the report is generated.
To Run the Billing Report

1. Request a Gather to ensure that the Billing Report reflects current charges (unless you want
a report of previous charges). See “To Run a Single Gather”.
The system displays status messages. When the Gather is complete, the system indicates
the number of mailboxes updated.
2. Enter R for Reports from the Main Menu.
3. Enter B for Billing.
4. Enter B to generate the Billing Report.
5. Enter C to send the report to the console without pausing.
Enter P to send the report to the console and pause as the screen fills.
The system prompts you to select mailbox numbers to bill:
Range of extensions to bill? (start-end) [<CR> for all]
6. Enter a mailbox number or range.
Valid entries are:

Single mailbox number (from 1 to 99999999999)
Range of mailbox numbers (for example: 2000-2999)
Press <Enter> to bill all mailbox numbers
If you want to bill two different ranges of mailbox numbers, you must run the report twice.
The system prompts:

FCOS service to bill? (1-640).
7. Enter an FCOS number or range from 1 through 640.
Valid entries are:

a = All
e = Even-numbered
o = Odd-numbered
l = Lower half
u = Upper half
Range of first-last (for example: 1-5)
Series of numbers separated by commas (for example: 1,3,5)
Single number
Press <Enter> to choose mailboxes regardless of FCOS assigned.
Note: FCOS 65 to 640 are billed at the rate for FCOS 64.

If you want to bill more than one FCOS, but not all, you must run a separate report for each
FCOS.
The system prompts:

LCOS service to bill? (1-640)
8. Enter an LCOS number or range from 1 through 640.
Valid entries are the same as those listed previously (see Step 7) for FCOS.
Press <Enter> to choose mailboxes regardless of LCOS assigned.
To bill selected LCOS, run a separate report for each one.
The system prompts:

GCOS service to bill? (1-64)
9. Enter a GCOS number or range from 1 through 64.
Valid entries are the same as those listed above (see Step 7) for FCOS.
Press <Enter> to choose mailboxes regardless of GCOS assigned (including affinity GCOS
65-32,000).
The system prompts:

NCOS service to bill? (1-64)
10. Enter an NCOS number or range from 1 through 64.
Valid entries are the same as those listed above (see Step 7) for FCOS.
Press <Enter> to choose mailboxes regardless of NCOS assigned.
The system prompts:

Department code to bill?
11. Enter a single department code (1 to 10 characters), or
press <CR> to bill all mailboxes regardless of department code.
The system prompts:
Pager system number to bill?
12. Enter a pager system number (0 through 15), or
press <CR> to choose mailboxes regardless of pager system assigned.
To bill a single group of pagers (with the same pager system number), enter the number of
the pager system. Separate reports for each pager system can be run if you wish.
Press <CR> to bill all mailboxes on the system.
The system runs the report according to the choices entered and sends it to the selected
destination.
Reading the Billing Report

The Billing Report prints out the charges for each mailbox individually by statistic, then it gives a
total.
Statistics with a zero (0) dollar amount are not reported. When charges are reported for all
mailboxes, the system concludes the report with a Billing Report Summary and returns to the
Billing Menu.

Mailbox Blocked Report (Blocked Billing Report)
The Mailbox Blocked Report (sometimes called Blocked Billing Report) retains a special format
and is usually sent out through the serial port to other databases. It presents the same
information as the Billing Report but in blocked form—without titles or summaries.
Use this report when you want to organize the billing data into your own format, such as for an
invoice or monthly statement.
To Run the Mailbox Blocked Report

2. Enter M to generate the Mailbox Blocked Report.
3. Complete Steps 5 through 12 under “To Run the Billing Report”.
Reading the Mailbox Blocked Report

To help you identify the field names and field lengths of statistics provided in the Mailbox Blocked
Report, use Table 13-1 "Field Descriptions for a Mailbox Blocked Report." All fields are right
justified; all fields other than the mailbox number are blank-filled.
Table 13-1 Field Descriptions for a Mailbox Blocked Report
Field Name Field Length

(Number of
Characters)
Mailbox number 16
Department code 10
User messages 5
Caller messages 5
Wakeup messages 5
Logins 5
Greets 5
User connect time 5
Caller connect time 5
Disk usage 10
Calls to pagers 5
Calls for message delivery 5
FCOS number (Repeated 16 times for line group billing.) 3
LCOS number (Repeated 16 times for line group billing.) 3
GCOS number (Repeated 16 times for line group billing.) 5
Number of network messages 5
Number of urgent network messages 5
Number of network nodes sent to 5
Number of network nodes sent urgent to 5
Number of remote network recipients sent to 5
Number of remote network recipients sent urgent to 5
0.1-minute increments of network messages sent 5
0.1-minute increments of network messages sent urgent 5

0.1-minute increments of network nodes sent to 5
0.1-minute increments of network nodes sent urgent to 5
0.1-minute increments of remote network recipients sent to 10
0.1-minute increments of remote network recipients sent urgent to 10
Number of network receipt responses 5
Number of network messages received 5
Number of network urgent messages received 5
0.1-minute increments of message length received over network 5
0.1-minute increments of urgent message length received over network 5
Number of fax messages received 5
Number of fax messages made 5
Number of fax messages retrieved 5
Number of failed fax retrievals 5
Fax disk usage 10
Number of fax pages received 5
Number of fax pages made 5
Number of fax pages retrieved 5
Number of fax retrievals billed 5
Number of fax pages retrieved, billed 5
Previous Billing Report

The Previous Billing Report is identical to the Billing Report except that it uses data from the
previous billing data file.
You can run a Previous Billing Report

• When a copy of the Billing Report from the previous billing period is desired.
• To determine proper billing when a Gather has failed.
• From either the hard disk or the backup diskette.
To Run the Previous Billing Report

2. Enter P to generate the Previous Billing Report.
The system prompts:
Where should billing data come from? (F/H/X)
3. Enter F to read data from the floppy backup diskette, or
Enter H to read data from the hard disk, or
Enter X to cancel this procedure and return to the Billing Menu.
4. When you want to read data from the backup diskette,
insert the appropriate diskette when prompted. Press <Enter>.
5. Complete Steps 6 through 12 under “To Run the Billing Report”.

Termination Report
The Termination Report shows statistics for each mailbox and provides a total in the same format
as the Billing Report. The Termination Report can be run for only one mailbox at a time.
A typical use of the Termination Report is in the hotel or motel environment. You can run a
Termination Report either before or after a mailbox is checked out and deleted, or when paging
service is discontinued in the middle of a billing cycle. Note the results can be different:
• Run the report before the mailbox is checked out

- The system does not charge for disk usage for unplayed messages (this resource is
calculated when messages are deleted).
- To charge only for messages the mailbox owner has played (before unplayed messages
are deleted).
• Run the report after the mailbox is checked out
- The system charges for all messages (all messages must be deleted in order to check
out the mailbox).
- To charge for all messages received whether they were played or not (check out the
mailbox first, then run the report).
Note: If there are any unplayed messages in the mailbox at the time the Termination Report is run the
system displays a warning, indicating the number of unplayed messages in the mailbox, and
reminds you that generating a Termination Report at this time will not include these unplayed
messages.
The report uses the same billing rates as the Billing Report, but the system allows you to enter a
new base rate in order to prorate charges over the length of time that the mailbox is in use.
EXAMPLE: If the base rate is $10.00 per month and the mailbox was in use for 15 days, you can change
the base rate to $5.00.
To zero the billing counters you must delete the mailbox, then recreate the mailbox.
The Termination Report gathers data from the mailbox but it does not create a previous billing
data file, nor does it update the billing counters. Thus, you can use this report to simply examine
the status of a mailbox.
To Run the Termination Report

1. Request a Gather to ensure that the Billing Report reflects current charges. See “To Run a
Single Gather”.
3. Enter B to access the Billing Menu.
4. Enter T to generate the Termination Report.
The system prompts you to specify the mailbox to report:
Termination Billing Report
Enter account to report [<CR> to exit]
5. Enter the number (1 to 99999999999) of the mailbox being terminated or to discontinue
paging service.

Press <Enter> if you do not want to run the report.
The system prompts you to specify a report destination.
6. Enter C to send the report to the console without pausing.
Enter P to send the report to the console and pause as the screen fills.
The system prompts you to specify a new base rate:
Enter new base rate [<CR> to keep displayed value]
FCOS <number>: <name> base rate ($0.00) ? $
7. Enter an amount from $0.01 through $654.99, or
Enter 0.00 to clear the current rate, or
Press <Enter> to keep the current setting.
Note: You must enter two digits after the decimal point when entering an amount or clearing the current
rate.
The system displays or prints the Termination Report for the specified mailbox and again
prompts: Enter Account to Report.
8. Specify the next mailbox to generate a report, or
Press <Enter> to exit.
14 System Maintenance Procedures
Understanding System Configuration

The system has two types of configuration: (1) offline configuration and (2) online configuration.
Many offline and online configuration settings work together. To configure the system, use both
the Offline and Online menus.


Note: The Offline Menu is used only to make changes to the Inactive configuration. The Active
configuration, by definition, is always online (never offline).

Making the "Switch"
Note: The Online Menu makes changes to the Active configuration; it does not make changes to the
Inactive configuration. Only when you activate the Inactive configuration to make the "switch", do the
changes take place.
Making Changes to Offline and Online Configuration Settings

The procedure to make changes to either the offline or the online configuration is summarized in
the following table. Use the NuPoint Voice Configuration Main Menu (enter S-R-R from the Main
Menu) to make your changes.
Step Procedure
1 Complete the NuPoint Voice Worksheet*.This worksheet provides you with a
complete application layout.
*Worksheets are available in Reference and Configuration (make necessary
copies).
Are you making any offline configuration changes?
2 If NO, make changes to the active online configuration.
Enter E or F from the NuPoint Voice Configuration Main Menu.

3 If YES, make changes to the offline configuration.
Access the Offline Menu (enter G from the NuPoint Voice Configuration Main
Menu). The system indicates the present configuration and warns you to
activate the configuration to enable changes.
EXAMPLE: OFFLINE MENU: configuration 1.
Currently active configuration is: 0.
(a) IMPORTANT STEP: Duplicate the active configuration.
Enter B from the Offline Menu.

This step allows you to make changes to a copy of the currently active
configuration.
EXAMPLE: CONFIG 0 copied to CONFIG 1.

(b) Make changes to the inactive configuration (for example, set up line groups).
(In the example, configuration # 1.)
Exit the Offline Menu to save changes.

4 Activate the configuration to implement all changes, both online (active) and
offline.
See “Process to Activate the Inactive Configuration”.

The system warns you to activate the inactive configuration to make the
changes effective. (In the example, configuration # 1.)
EXAMPLE: ACTIVATE CONFIGURATION to enable changes!
Service will be lost for three minutes while the system shuts down and resets
the software to the new configuration; the configuration "switch" is complete.
Make additional changes to the active online configuration (as in Step 2).
NOTE: If you experience problems, repeat this step (activate the inactive configuration
again) to return to the previous setup.
Summary of System Maintenance Requirements

The System Maintenance Menu provides console maintenance options. Certain procedures can
be performed either online or offline. Some offline system maintenance functions are stored on
the Maintenance Diskette.
A maintenance checklist (below) provides a summary of regular system maintenance procedures.

Complete these procedures as recommended. Detailed instructions and additional System
Maintenance Menu options are provided within this chapter.
Run Verify (Large systems 18-24 ports)
Weekly
Run a
Total
System
Statistics
Report
Run a
Logfile
Report
Perform
Manual
Message
Purge
Perform Floppy Backup to diskette
Monthly
Run Verify
(Small -
Medium
systems,
less than18

ports)
Compare
Logfile and
Verify
Reports
To reach the System Maintenance Menu, enter S from the console Main Menu.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
(F) Floppy Backup
(R) Reconfiguration
(S) System Shutdown
(T) Module Status
(U) System Verify
(V) Event Recorder
(W) Network Menu
(X) Exit
Automatic Wakeup
To take advantage of this feature, install the Auto-Wakeup optional feature software and define it
in the mailbox.
This feature allows users to schedule their own wakeup calls from the telephone (FCOS 015
Change wakeup options).
NP Receptionist
In an integrated server and PBX system, you can configure NP Receptionist to answer a call to
the main company number. In addition to the main number, you can configure other NP
Receptionist extensions to form a hunt group so that if the main number is busy, the next call
goes to another NP Receptionist extension.
Use this procedure if you have a heavily used system and require a hunt group for NP
Receptionist.
To Add or Delete an NP Receptionist Extension

1. Enter B from the System Maintenance Menu.
AUTOMATED RECEPTIONIST’S EXTENSIONS
(A) Add an Extension

(D) Delete an Extension
(P) Print the Extension List
(R) Change Receptionist Dial String
(X) Exit
2. Enter A to add an extension.

Receptionist’s extension to add:
or
Enter D to delete an extension.
Receptionist’s extension to delete:

3. Type the extension number.
4. Press <Enter> to save the number when you add an extension.
5. Enter P to print the extension list.
To Change the Receptionist Dial String

1. Enter B from the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter P to print the extension list and display the NP Receptionist dial string.
3. Enter R to change the receptionist dial string.
New Receptionist Dial String?
4. Type the new dial string.
Receptionist dial string can vary from 1 to 16 digits

(0-9, A-D, +, *, #)
Note: The dial string is sent by an integrated system port when a Receptionist port is forwarded to it.
Usually, the Receptionist port is told to hang up by putting a # sign (pound) in the dial string.
5. Enter X to save your changes.
Floppy Backup
Backup files on floppy diskettes are a precaution against inadvertent loss or destruction of data or
system information files on your system's hard disk(s). The system continues to process calls
throughout the backup process.
It is recommended that you back up your hard disk files to floppy at least once per month. Also
make backups at the following times:
• Before you perform a Gather (in preparation for running a Billing Report)
• Before you make major changes to mailbox data files (for example, when you add a large
number of mailboxes to your system).
You should use 3.5-inch double-sided, high-density (1.44 MB) diskettes. Be sure to label and
date all backup diskettes. The system formats any diskettes that are not already formatted.

Information Copied from Hard Disk to Backup Diskette
• Console passcode
• Configuration data
• Mailbox file
- Mailbox number
- FCOS
- LCOS
- GCOS
- NCOS
- Day and night treatment types
- Passcode
- Message waiting indicator (including AC message waiting light address, or pager outdial
index (access code index) and number, if applicable
- Distribution lists, including mailbox number
• Phoneline information (per line)
- Phoneline number
- Telephony parameter exceptions
• Billing rates file
• Current billing data file
• Previous billing data file
To Create Floppy Backups

1. Enter F from the System Maintenance Menu.
The system prompts:
Insert Backup Diskette 1 in floppy drive

Enter 'Y' when ready, or 'N' to quit:
2. Do you want to go ahead with the backup?
YES Insert a floppy diskette in the floppy drive.
Enter Y. Go to the next step.
NO Enter N to cancel the backup process.
The system verifies the diskette, then proceeds with the backup process.
Note: If the system cannot verify the diskette, remove it from the disk drive, re-insert it, and repeat Steps 1
and 2.
3. Does the system display the message below?

Invalid backup diskette...need formatting
Enter 'Y' for formatting or 'N' to quit:
YES Go to the next step.
NO Go to Step 5.
4. Formatting the diskette destroys all existing information on it.

Do you want to format the floppy diskette?
YES Enter Y.
The system formats the diskette, then performs the backup.
Go to the next step.
NO Enter N to cancel the backup process.
The system transfers information from the hard disk to the floppy diskette and displays:
Backup in progress.
5. Does the system prompt you to insert additional diskettes?
YES Insert the requested diskette, then go back to Step 2.
NO Go to the next step.
After the system completes the backup, it displays an abbreviated version of the System
Maintenance Menu.
6. Remove the diskette and date all backup diskettes.
The backup procedure is now complete.
Accessing the Backup Data

There are two ways to access the backup data.
1. Print the Previous Billing Report from the backup diskette.
This method is used when a system failure occurs during the Gather step of the Billing
Report. (“Step 2: Perform a Gather”.)
2. Use the procedure to "Perform a System Restore," described in Chapter 5 of the Installation
and Service Manual, Installation.
This procedure copies the backed up information, except the current and previous billing data
files, from the floppy to the hard disk. Any recorded speech is left unchanged. The system
must be shut down in order to perform the "system restore" procedure.
Access Limitations
The current and previous billing data files can only be accessed when the system technician
performs a "system install". A complete system installation restores all software files, but erases
all speech stored on the hard disk, including greetings and messages. The system must be
shut down to perform this procedure (the system cannot process calls).
Resynchronize HIS PMS Room Status

This maintenance option is used for resynchronization when performing a system backup, and is
only applicable to systems with HIS PMS.
• Enter G from the System Maintenance Menu.
Hard Disk Utilities

Enter H from the System Maintenance Menu to enable hard disk functions. Choose from the

following menu options:
HARD DISK UTILITIES MENU

(D) Diagnose a Disk
(E) SCSI Status
(H) Hard Disk Media Check
(J) Verify Redundancy
(K) Update Redundancy
(O) Display the Operational Parameters for a Disk
(P) Physical Table Display
(S) Set the Operational Parameters for Modules and Disks
(V) Virtual Table Display
(X) Exit
Run Diagnose
All system software necessary for day-to-day operation of this system, the configuration files,
mailbox files, account data, and all speech are stored on the hard disk. When a problem with the
hard disk is suspected, run the Diagnose program.
The system allows you to run the diagnose program three ways.
(a) With the system online; you can check the hard disk while the system is processing calls (see
To Run Diagnose with the System Online).
(b) With the system offline, by using the On-Site Diagnostics Diskette (see To Run Diagnose with
the System Offline - On Site Diagnostics Diskette).
(c) With the system offline, by using the Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu (To Run Diagnose
with the System Offline - Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu).
This program is also found on the Maintenance Diskette, after you run Verify.
Items Tested
The Diagnose program performs the following non-destructive tests on the hard disk system:
• Internal diagnostic test of the hard disk drive controller
• Controller RAM test
• Hard disk drive sequential verify
• 256-random-track verify
• Spiral verify
• Write/read test on a reserved sector of the hard disk drive
To Run Diagnose with the System Online

It is preferable to run the online version of Diagnose to allow the system to continue to process
calls. Online Diagnose is run from the Hard Disk Utilities Menu.
1. Enter H to access the Hard Disk Utilities Menu from the system Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter D to diagnose a disk.

The system prompts:
Enter the hard disk ID [bus: scsiId] to test, or A for all, or Q to quit.
3. Enter A to test all the disks in the system, or
Enter the two-digit SCSI ID number of the disk to be tested.
The system prompts you to identify the tests to be executed:
All options default to ’Y’:

Perform Controller Test?
4. Enter Y or press <Enter> to perform the test, or
Enter N to skip the test.
Perform Sequential Test?
Enter Y or press <Enter> to perform the test, or

Perform Random Seek Test?

Perform Spiral Seek Test?

Perform Write/Read Test?

The system displays the drive number and the test it is performing; then it provides a
"passed" status.
5. If any test does not pass, contact your authorized dealer.
To Run Diagnose with the System Offline (On-Site Diagnostics Diskette)

The On-Site Diagnostics diskette provides a set of functional tests that help to identify possible
sources of trouble. Any part of the system that appears to be causing the trouble must be
investigated further.
The system cannot process calls while this version of the Diagnose program is running. The test
takes 30 to 40 minutes to complete. Telephone lines must be connected to all ports to get valid
test results.
1. Insert the On-Site Diagnostics diskette into the floppy disk drive. Push the RESET button or
turn on the system.
The on-site diagnostics runs (this program takes a few minutes to load).
2. Note the times and dates of the resets in the Logbook.
The system prompts:
Press <CR> to start Linecard Telephony Interface and LED.

3. Press <Enter> to execute the Linecard Telephony Interface and LED test.

The test runs.
4. Press <Enter> when the Linecard Telephony Interface and LED test is finished. Press
<Enter>.
....1ct test finished ....<CR> to continue
5. Press <Enter>.
The system continues the testing, then it produces a report.
6. Verify the information in the report. All results should be listed as OK.
7. Press <Enter>.
8. Note any tests that failed. If any tests do not pass, contact your authorized dealer.
9. Press the RESET button to reset the system.
To Run Diagnose with the System Offline (Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu)
This procedure describes how to run the hard disk Diagnose program from the Maintenance from
Hard Disk Menu. It is assumed the module running the test is shut down using the process
described under “System Shutdown”.
This version of Diagnose requires the module to be removed from normal operation. It is
recommended that you run this process during periods of low-call traffic. The procedure takes 30
to 40 minutes to complete.
If possible, the online version of this program should be run from the Hard Disk Utilities Menu in
order to permit call processing to continue. See “To Run Diagnose with the System Online”, for
instructions.
Starting the Offline Test

1. Perform System Shutdown. Press the RESET button.
The system prompts:
Run commands from floppy disk? Y/N [N]:

2. Enter N or press <Enter> within three seconds.
The system prompts:
Run MAINTENANCE from hard disk? Y/N [N]:

3. Enter Y within three seconds to boot the module to the Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu.
The system asks:
Choose one of the following activities:

add.extracost
console
diagnose
host.status
modem.setup
onsite.diag
promps.add
qnx
system.restore
verify
Enter one of the names:

4. Type diagnose.
The system prompts:
Hard disk diagnostic. Non-destructive.

Running the following tests...
Enter the hard disk id[bus:scsiId] to test, or A for all, or Q to quit.
5. Enter A (otherwise, enter the bus and two-digit SCSI ID numbers (separated by a colon) of
the disk to test).
The system prompts you to identify the tests to execute:
All options default to ’Y’:

Perform Controller Test?
6. Enter Y or press <Enter> to perform the test, or
Perform Sequential Test?

Perform Random Seek Test?

Perform Spiral Seek Test?

Wait while the system performs the tests and reports:

HARD DISK DIAGNOSTIC FINISHED
7. If any test does not pass, contact your authorized dealer.
8. If all tests pass, enable the module being tested.
Type host.status
The system prompts:
MODULE MAINTENANCE MENU

(D) Disable a Module
(E) Enable a Module
(X) Exit
9. Enter E to Enable a module.

The system prompts:
Input a module ID in the following range:

1
Which Module?
10. Enter 1 to enable.

Rebooting module 1...
Wait for the module to automatically reset and return to normal operation.
11. Login when prompted.
Manual Message Purge

The manual message purge clears the hard disk of unplayed, urgent, and played messages; it
frees disk space for other tasks.
A manual message purge should be done weekly, or

• When the Statistics Report shows that disk speech storage is greater than 80%
• When users hear the login warning:
"Message storage is nearly full, please discard any unnecessary messages."
(The system automatically issues this warning.)
Notify Users
Users may have specific reasons for keeping messages for a long time. Before you do a manual
message purge, it is a good idea to send a Message of the Day, to inform users which types of
messages will be purged. See Chapter 6, "Recording Messages/Greetings/Tutorials," for
instructions.
Unlike the automatic message purge, the manual message purge does not use the LCOS to
determine which messages to delete. You can limit purging to a select group of messages by
responding to the prompts in the next section.
To Perform a Manual Message Purge

1. Enter M from the System Maintenance Menu.
The system prompts:
Range of extensions to purge? (first-last) [return for all]

2. To limit purging to a specific range of mailboxes, enter the numbers of the first and last
mailboxes in the range, separated by a hyphen (for example, 100-399).
Press <Enter> to check all mailboxes for old messages.
The system prompts:
Feature Classes to purge (o,e,u,l,number(s) or range) [<CR> for all].

3. Enter:
o = odd numbered only
e = even numbered only
u = upper half only
l = lower half only
x-y to enter a range
x, y... z to enter individual classes
x to enter a single class of service
<Enter> = purge all mailboxes or purge all classes of service
(x and y are numbers between 1 and 640)

The system prompts:
Group Classes to purge (o,e,u,l,number(s) or range) [<CR> for all].
4. Enter o/e/u/l, the number(s), range, or press <Enter> for all (enter numbers between 1 and
64).
The system offers a series of age prompts:
5. The age of played, unplayed, and urgent messages to purge can specify any number
between two hours and one year (8760 hours).
Press <Enter> if you do not want messages to be purged.

Age, in hours, of played messages to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
The age of a played message indicates the number of hours it is stored on the hard disk after
it was played and kept.
Age, in hours, of unplayed messages to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
This value indicates the number of hours an unplayed message is stored on the hard disk.
Age, in hours, of urgent messages to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
This value indicates the number of hours an urgent message is stored.
Age, in hours, of cut-through receipts to purge? [<CR> for no purge].

Age, in hours, of receipts to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
Age, in hours, of played fax messages to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
Age, in hours, of unplayed fax messages to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
Age, in hours, of urgent fax messages to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
Age, in hours, of fax receipts to purge? [<CR> for no purge].
Age, in absolute hours, of messages to purge? [<CR> to ignore].
Purge Distribution Lists (Enter ’Y’ or <CR> for no purge].
Purge searches distribution lists for all mailboxes. If a mailbox is in a distribution list, but that
mailbox does not exist, Purge removes it from the distribution list. (When this mailbox is the
last one in a list, the list is deleted.)
Age, in hours, of NIB copy lists to be purged? [<CR> for no purge].
Enter a value between 1 and 999.
The system displays the conditions you specified for the messages to purge.
6. (a) Type purge (lowercase letters) to activate the purge if the conditions are correct.
The system displays purge status.

(b) If the conditions are incorrect, press <Enter>.
No purge.
You must start the procedure again.
Purging is complete when the system displays the shortened version of the System
Maintenance Menu.

An automatic message purge runs just after midnight, every 24 hours, without input from the
administrator. The parameters of the automatic purge are dictated by the LCOS of each mailbox.
Site Name, Code, Banner

A site (system) name is required to successfully complete the backup to a floppy diskette. The
system name that you enter using this procedure is printed at the top of all reports.
To Name the Site and Set the Site Code and Banner
Follow the steps given in “Step 3: Name Your Site”.
Passcode
Select the Passwords/Security option to
• Change the console passcode.
• Enter or delete a personal remote console (modem) passcode.
To Change the Console Passcode

Follow the procedure outlined in “Step 2: Passcode-Protect the Console”.
CAUTION: Do not enter a "formula" passcode that can easily be guessed by

unauthorized users. Console access is a powerful function.
To Enter a Personal Remote Passcode

Follow the procedure outlined in “Step 2: Passcode-Protect the Console”.
To Delete a Personal Remote Passcode

1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in “Step 2: Passcode-Protect the Console”.
2. When you are prompted to type in your passcode, press <Enter>.
The system clears the current passcode and displays a shortened version of the System
Maintenance Menu.
Until a passcode is entered, the system is protected by the default passcode. (See “15.
Enter a Temporary Passcode”.)
System Reconfiguration
Use the System Configuration Menu to reconfigure the system software, change phoneline
exceptions, and/or build FCOS and LCOS.
To access the System Configuration Menu enter R from the System Maintenance Menu.

(A) Restore COS
(B) Backup COS
(F) Feature COS
(G) Group COS
(L) Limits COS
(M) Restriction COS
(N) Network COS
(T) Tenant COS
(X) Exit
Process to Activate the Inactive Configuration

For a description of offline, online, active, and inactive configurations, refer to “Understanding
System Configuration”.
Offline configuration entries should be made on a duplicate version of the active configuration.
This copy allows you to make changes to the inactive configuration as well as to check and
correct entries before activating the configuration—before changes become effective.
Step 1: Duplicate the Active Configuration

1. Enter R to reach the NuPoint Voice Configuration - Main Menu.
VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION - MAIN MENU
(A) Activate Configuration
(B) Hardware Configuration
(C) Increase System Hours
(D) Define Floating Modules
(E) Modify Active Configuration
(F) Modify Inactive Configuration
(G) Offline Menu
(H) Configure Unified Integration
(X) Exit
2. Enter G to select the Offline Menu.

OFFLINE MENU: configuration 1.
Currently active configuration is: 0.
VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION - OFFLINE MENU
(A) Linegroup Only Applications
(L) Linegroup and RS232 Applications
(M) RS232 Only Applications
(E) RS232 or Smartcard Integrations
(I) Linegroup and Smartcard Integrations
(T) DTMF to PBX Message Lights
(D) Pre-Extension Dial String
(P) SL-1 Phone Emulator Menu
(F) Serial Redirect Float Menu
(G) Define Line Groups and Fax Groups
(N) NP Net (Async and TCP/IP) Menu

(O) CSOIO Integration Menu
(S) Auto Gather - System Billing
(U) Unified TCP/IP Menu
(Y) Configure Smartcard Table
(C) Report Current Configuration
(B) Duplicate Active Configuration
(Q) Quit -- Forget Changes
(X) Exit -- Save Changes
3. Enter B to duplicate the active configuration.

The system indicates duplication of configuration records. For example:
Config 0 copied to config 1
4. Proceed with configuration changes.
Step 2: Define Line Group in Offline Menu

• Each line (or port) in a group has a set of three identifiers, called a triplet. The triplet
indicates the module (host), the line card slot, and the port on a line card:
Module (host)
- Refers to the system’s main processor (a CPU)
- Numbered 1 through 4
Slot
- Numbered 0 through 15
Port
- Each line card has a number of ports
- One telephone line can be connected to each port
- Numbering starts at 0, the upper limit depends on the type of line card you use
• The triplet maintains the format 1:2:5; where 1 indicates the module, 2 indicates the slot,
and 5 indicates the port.
Enter triplets as shown in Step 8 of these instructions.
5. Enter G to define Line Groups and Fax Groups.

The system displays the Line Groups Menu:
LINE GROUPS
(G) Current Group = [1]
(N) Name of Current Group = [ ]
(S) Show ALL Groups
(T) Show THIS Group
(U) Show Unassigned Lines
(A) Add Lines to Current Group
(D) Drop Lines from Current Group
(F) Define Fax Groups
(C) Fax Group Connections for Current Line Group
(X) Exit

6. Enter G to select the Current Group.
Enter a Group number (1 is selected by default).
Group <number> has no lines assigned.

7. Enter N to name the current group.
Enter the name you choose for this group.
8. Enter A to add lines to this group.

Lines are added by entering their triplet identifiers (module:slot:port). The actual triplet (line
number) is used to define the line.

Line number range: <module>:<slot>:<port>- <module>:<slot>:<port>.
Wild card entry * (all lines all modules), or <module>:* (all lines on <module>, or
<module>:<slot>:* (all ports on <module>:<slot>).
Separate multiple values by commas.
9. Enter T to Show This group and confirm that the lines you added appear correctly.
10. Enter X to Exit the Line Groups Menu and return to the Offline Menu.
11. Enter A to select the Linegroup Only Applications Menu.
Select the appropriate application (for example: Pager, Enhanced In-band).
12. Enter X. Changes should not be required.

13. Enter X to return to the Offline Menu.
14. Enter X to Exit and Save Changes.
The system writes the changes to the offline configuration and returns to the NuPoint Voice
Configuration - Main Menu.
You must activate the configuration to enable changes (see “Step 3: Activate the
Configuration”).
Step 3: Activate the Configuration

Changes made to the offline configuration take effect only after you activate the configuration.
CAUTION: This procedure causes the system to restart all tasks, and results in an
interruption of call processing. It is recommended that you perform this
procedure during periods of low-call traffic.
1. Enter R to access the System Configuration Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter R to reconfigure the system.
VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION - MAIN MENU
(B) Hardware Configuration
(C) Increase System Hours
(D) Define Floating Modules

(E) Modify Active Configuration
(F) Modify Inactive Configuration
(G) Offline Menu
(H) Configure Unified Integration
(X) Exit
3. Enter A for the Active Configuration Menu.

ACTIVE CONFIGURATION MENU
(N) Name Configurations
(V) View Configurations
(X) Exit
4. Enter A to activate the configuration.
The system displays information, as in the following example:
Configuration last edited by OFFLINE CONFIGURATION is 0.

CONFIG NAME ACTIVE DATE ACT DATE
NUMBER
00 CONFIGURATION # 0 NO 02/23/96 10:19
01 CONFIGURATION # 1 YES 02/21/96 10:21 02/21/96 10:21
Activate inactive configuration, ’CONFIGURATION # 0’? [Y/N]:
5. Enter Y (to warn system users of the impending system shutdown).
The system updates configuration records, automatically shuts down, and resets the software
to the new configuration.
The system indicates: Program Initialization Complete and returns to the Active Configuration
Menu.
Note: If the system experiences problems with the new configuration, you can return to the "old"
configuration by repeating these steps.
System Shutdown
System shutdown is an orderly procedure that warns callers when the system terminates call
processing. You should run this program before turning off the power to a MITEL NUPOINT
MESSENGER system module.
It is recommended that you perform this procedure during periods of low-call traffic.
What Happens When I Give the System Shutdown Order?

• The system asks for the modules (hosts) to shutdown.
- This system is a one-module server (enter A for all, or
press <Enter>).
• System phone lines are listed; the line states display indicates whether the line is "active",
"idle", or "stopped".
• Phone lines carrying calls (at the time you give the shutdown command) are taken offhook
when the caller who leaves a message, or the user who is logged into a mailbox, either

presses a key or allows a silence timeout.
- The caller or user hears the shutdown warning and is disconnected:
"I'm sorry, the system is currently shut down for maintenance. Please call back later."
EXAMPLE: If the shutdown occurs while a user is making a message for another system user, he can
continue to record the message. But when he presses a key to review the message, or stops
recording for the silence timeout interval, the system interrupts the call, plays the shutdown
warning, sends the message, and logs out the user.
- Phone lines taken offhook by the system are listed as idle in the line states display
(prevented from answering new incoming or outgoing calls).
- Phone lines with interrupted calls are listed as stopped in the line states display.
• All message-waiting indicator requests are canceled. Message lights are turned off even
when there are unplayed messages in mailboxes.
- Pager/message delivery calls and re-pages are not made during shutdown or afterward.
- Message Indicator Request Queue Length shows how many message requests were lost
on shutdown.
- The system displays the status of each line and the lengths of the message indictor and
paging request queues.
- Lights are not turned on until new messages are received after shutdown.
• Callers who try to access the shutdown lines will hear a busy signal until the system is
completely rebooted.
To Perform System Shutdown
CAUTION: You should follow the policies of your site to warn users prior to the
system shutdown, because this process removes the server from call
processing.
1. Enter S for System Shutdown from the System Maintenance Menu.

The system gives the lines states and offers a warning:
WARNING! This will terminate call processing.
Type "shutdown" if you really want to do this.
2. Type shutdown (lowercase).
The system updates the line states, then prompts:
Modules to shut down:

3. Enter A, or press <Enter>.
The system displays the status of each line of the specified module(s) as "idle," "active" or
"stopped," and updates the status every minute until all lines are stopped. The system stops
any calls still in progress after five minutes.
4. Enter Y to wait for message waiting queues to clear before you execute a system shutdown.
Enter Y to wait for paging queues to clear.
When all lines of the specified modules are taken offhook, the system prompts:
Perform Offline System Verification?
Note: Step 5 offers the opportunity to run Verify. You can run the Verify program to identify a general

system problem (see To Run Verify with the System Offline (During System Shutdown).
5. Enter Y to execute the Verify (instructions), or

Enter N to skip Verify and continue with the shutdown.
The system prompts you to specify changes to the status of each module:
Enable or Disable Modules?

6. Enter N to keep the module status the same, since this is a single-module system.
The system completes the shutdown:
****SHUTDOWN COMPLETE****
The System Maintenance Menu is displayed.
If you entered Y at Step 6, a chart showing module status and the Module Maintenance Menu
are displayed.
7. Enter X to exit and return to the Main Menu.
You can now either push the RESET button to reboot the module or remove the power to the
module.
Program Initialization Complete
When the system is reset (each time the RESET button is pushed), the initialization program
offers the Verify option.
Run Verify
The Verify utility program
• Checks the data structures of the following areas on the hard disk:
- Software
- Billing
- Mailbox
- Prompt
- Message
• Generates a disk usage report; includes all errors found.
• Fixes any reference count errors that may have occurred.
EXAMPLE: When a user deletes a message, the system deletes the text of the message from the hard
disk, but does not delete the software "pointer" connecting that message with the
corresponding mailbox, or vice-versa. When the system resets, some messages may be cut
off, or messages and their pointers may become misaligned. Verify "cleans up" the hard disk
by realigning messages and pointers, when possible, and deleting all unconnected messages
and pointers.
• Should be run monthly (for systems with less than 18 ports).
- Large systems (18 to 24 ports) should run Verify weekly.
The system allows you to run the diagnose program three ways:
(a) With the system online (see To Run Verify with the System Online).

Online Verify makes it possible to test each category separately.
(b) With the system offline, during system shutdown (see To Run Verify with the System Offline
(During System Shutdown).
(c) With the system offline, by using the Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu (see To Run Verify
with the System Offline).
Offline Verify combines verification of both account records and speech.
To run a complete Verify, all account records and all speech records must be tested.
To Run Verify with the System Online

You have the option of logging the results of the Verify and of using them at a later time. Because
the system responds differently when the results are logged, these instructions include steps to
run the Verify with and without logging the results.
Verify Records and Log Results

1. Enter U to access the System Verify Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
SYSTEM VERIFY MENU
(D) Display Results of Last Verify
(R) Verify Records
(S) Verify Speech
(X) Exit
2. Enter R to Verify Records
The system prompts:
Log results? [Y/N]

3. Enter Y to log results for future.
The system prompts:
Results of previous Verify will be lost....

Please confirm by entering "Y".
4. Enter Y.
Logging results to disk...
RECORD VERIFICATION MENU
(A) Verify All Records
(B) Verify Sibling Lists
(C) Verify Copy Lists
(D) Verify Distribution Lists
(M) Verify Mailboxes
(N) Verify AMIS Lists
(P) Verify Phoneline Exceptions
(S) Verify Statistics Data
5. Select the type(s) of records to verify.

For standard maintenance of the system, select A Verify All Records.
If the system has a specific problem, select the appropriate record type to verify.

The system console displays dots while performing the Verify.
After the Verify is complete, the system returns to the Record Verification Menu.
Verify Records without Logging Results

2. Enter R to Verify Records
The system prompts:
Log results? [Y/N]

3. Enter N to specify not to log results.
The system indicates that the results will NOT be logged to disk; then it displays the Record
Verification Menu.
4. Complete Step 5 in "Verify Records and Log Results".
The system displays the test results as each test is completed; then it returns to the Record
Verification Menu.
Verify Speech and Log Results

2. Enter S to Verify Speech.
The system prompts:
Log results? [Y/N]

3. Enter Y to log results for future use.
The system prompts:
Results of previous Verify will be lost...

Please confirm by entering ’Y’.
4. Enter Y.
Logging results to disk...
SPEECH VERIFICATION MENU
(A) Verify All Speech and Prompts
(P) Verify Prompts
(S) Verify Speech
4. Select the type(s) of speech to verify.

For standard maintenance of the system, select A Verify All Speech and Prompts.
If the system has a specific problem, select either speech or prompts for verification.
The system console displays dots while performing the Verify.
After the Verify is complete, the system returns to the System Verify Menu.
Verify Speech without Logging Results

2. Enter S to Verify Speech.
The system prompts:
Log results? [Y/N]

3. Enter N to specify not to log results.
The system indicates that the results will NOT be logged to disk; then it displays the Speech
Verification Menu.
4. Select the type(s) of speech to verify.
For standard maintenance of the system, select A Verify All Speech and Prompts.
If the system has a specific problem, select either speech or prompts for verification:
Wait while the system displays the test results as each test is completed. The system
returns to the Speech Verification Menu.
If any errors are detected, contact your authorized dealer.
To Run Verify with the System Offline (During System Shutdown)

Offline system verification can only be run when the module is shut down. Because the system
cannot process calls during this time, it is recommended that Verify be run after office hours or
during periods of low-call traffic. Depending on the size of your system, this program may take
approximately 20 minutes to run.
1. Enter S to execute a System Shutdown from the System Maintenance Menu.
The system prompts:

WARNING! This will terminate call processing.
Type "shutdown" if you really want to do this.
2. Type shutdown (lowercase).

The system asks which modules are to be shut down:
Modules to shut down?

3. Enter A for all.
The system prompts:
Wait for message waiting queues to be empty?

4. Enter Y to wait for message waiting queues to clear.
Wait for paging queues to be empty?
5. Enter Y to wait for paging queues to clear.
After all lines are taken offhook, the system asks if a Verify is to be executed:
Perform Offline System Verification?

6. Enter Y to execute the Verify.
The system asks if the results of the Verify are to be recorded:
Log results? [Y/N]

7. Enter Y if you want to log the results, or press <Enter> if you do not.
When the Verify is complete, the system continues with the shutdown and asks
if the system should wait while the message-waiting indicators are updated.
If any errors were detected during the Verify, contact your authorized dealer.
8. Change the status of the module if desired.

Enable or Disable Modules?
Enter Y if access to the module status menu is desired, or

Enter N to skip changing the status of the modules and MOVE TO STEP 11.
9. If you answered YES in Step 8, a chart showing module status and the
Module Maintenance Menu are displayed.
Enter E to enable a Module. Press <Enter> for module 1.
or
Enter D to disable a Module. Press <Enter> for module 1.
Type disable to confirm your request.
If the status of the module attached to the console is changed, the remainder of this
procedure is not seen while the module resets.
10. After you finish configuring the module, enter X to exit the menu.
The system completes the shutdown:
****SHUTDOWN COMPLETE****
Note: The System Maintenance Menu is displayed even though the system is not operational.
11. Enter X, then enter R to access the Reports Menu.

12. Enter V for Offline Verify to review the Verify Report.
(C) Console
(P) Console with Pause
(1) Serial Port 1
(2) Serial Port 2
(F) File...
(A) Append to File...
(X) Exit (No Report)
Choose a report destination.

13. If any errors were recorded in the report, contact your authorized dealer.
Press any key to continue.
14. Enter X to exit and return to the Main Menu.
15. Turn off the system power, or press the RESET button to reboot.
To Run Verify with the System Offline (Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu)
1. Perform System Shutdown.
Press the RESET button.
While the machine resets, note the time and date of the reset in the Logbook.
The system prompts:
Run commands from floppy disk? Y/N [N]

2. Enter N or press <Enter> within three seconds.

The system prompts:
Run MAINTENANCE from hard disk? Y/N [N]

3. Enter Y within three seconds to boot the module to the Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu.
The system asks:
Choose one of the following activities:

add.extracost
console
diagnose
host.status
modem.setup
onsite.diag
promps.add
qnx
system.restore
verify
Enter one of the names:
4. Type verify.
The system prompts:
Log results [Y/N]? [N]

5. Enter Y if you want to log the results, or press <Enter> if you do not.
The system runs the Verify program. It takes about 20 minutes to verify the hard disk.
When the Verify is complete, the report is displayed on the console terminal, and the system
completes the reboot process.
The module automatically resets and returns to normal operation.
After the Verify Report is Complete

• If you receive the message, "Verify complete. Reboot the system," the errors noted in the
Verify Report are fixed.
Reboot the system and check for proper operation. If there is still a problem, see “To Run
Diagnose with the System Offline (On-Site Diagnostics Diskette)”.
• If you receive the message, "Verify failed," a problem may exist with the hard disk.
Run the Diagnose program to detect any hard disk errors. See “Run Diagnose”. If Diagnose
runs successfully, re-run the Verify program.
• If there are no problems with the hard disk, return the system to normal operation.
Network Menu
1. Enter W for the Network Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
NETWORK MENU
(M) Network Maintenance
(R) Network Reports
(X) Exit

2. Enter M to access network maintenance options.
NETWORK MAINTENANCE
(D) Digits Translation
(Q) Modify Network Queueing
(T) Network Node Table
(A) Hardware Setup
(B) Link Setup
(X) Exit
3. Enter R (from the Network Menu) to access network reporting options.

NETWORK REPORTS
(D) Digits Translation Report
(N) Node Table Report
(Q) Network Queue Report
(L) Link Report
(H) Hardware Report
(T) Network Transport Query
(W) Network Link Query
(X) Exit
4. Select the report option and the destination for the output.
The system runs the report and sends it to the selected destination.
Additional Options
Enter O to access additional system maintenance options.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE - ADDITIONAL OPTIONS

(A) Add Optional Feature(s)
(R) Install RSD or PATCH
(C) Choose Terminal Type
(G) Digital Connectivity Menu
(I) Set/Display Console Type
(L) Lights Test
(P) Console/Serial Port Setup Menu
(Q) System Alarms
(S) Software Update Menu
(T) Time and Date
(U) Utility Menu
(Y) Time Zone Configuration
(X) Exit
Lights Test
The lights test is used to test the function of message-waiting indicators (usually lights).
Depending on the programming of the mailbox being tested, the lights test can also activate
pagers and provide stutter dial tone.
To Perform a Lights Test

1. Enter O to access the Additional Options Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter L for lights test.
Mailbox to light (1 - 99999999999)
3. Enter the number of the mailbox associated with the light to be tested.
A range of mailboxes may be tested; separate with a hyphen the first and last mailbox
numbers in the series (for example, 100-399).
Light off/on/existing value (0/1/2)

4. Enter 0 (zero) to turn the message waiting indicator(s) OFF
Enter 1 to turn the indicator(s) ON
Enter 2 to update the indicator(s) to the current correct state(s).
Note: The "correct state" is ON if there is at least one unplayed message in the mailbox, and OFF if no
unplayed messages reside in the mailbox.
The system asks:
Message waiting type (0 or <CR> for all)

5. Press <Enter> to test any message waiting type(s) associated with the test mailbox(es).
or
Enter a number (from 2 through 24) to test a specific message waiting indicator: For a
description of the message waiting lights, see “Message Waiting Types”.
6. Check the state of the indicator(s) for proper functioning.
To return the indicators to their correct states, repeat Steps 3 through 5 and enter 2 at Step
4.
Note: Pagers must be set to OFF before they can be reactivated a second time.
The system prompts:
Mailbox to Light (1 - 99999999999)

7. Press <Enter> to return to the Additional Options Menu.
Time and Date

This option allows you to reset the system time and date. You can also review the time and date
without changing it by pressing <Enter> in response to the prompts.
1. Enter O to access the Additional Options Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter T for Time and Date.
The current time and date is given; then the system prompts:
Enter new value or press <CR> to leave unchanged.
Enter date (mm-dd-yy):
3. Enter the new date.

mm = two-digit month code
dd = two-digit day code
yy = two-digit year code
Press <Enter> to reset the date.
The system prompts:
Enter time (hh:mm [am/pm])

4. Enter the new time (specify a.m. or p.m.).
EXAMPLE: To enter January 4, 1996 at 1:12 p.m., type:
01-04-96
01:12 pm
5. Press <Enter> to reset the time.
Run a Total System Statistics Report

The Total System Statistics Report shows the amount of storage capacity consumed on the hard
disk and the amount available.
You should run this report on a weekly basis. To generate and read this report, see “Total System
Statistics Report”.
Run a Logfile Report

The Logfile Report shows whether there has been an unusual number of module or system errors
or resets.
You are advised to view or print, and clear this report on a weekly basis. See “Logfile Report” for
instructions on how to redirect, read, and delete the Logfile.
Note: The Logfile Report can become extensive and, therefore, time-consuming to scroll through.
Technical Support Information

If you experience system problems consult the Troubleshooting volume, before you call your
authorized dealer.
If the system unit requires service, contact your authorized dealer.
Your dealer requires the following information:

• Complete description of the problem
• Serial number of the hard disk
• Storage capacity (hours) of the hard disk
• Software version the system is running
• Part number

Most of this information is found in the System Information Report.
In certain situations, you may need to provide current printouts of the following reports:
• Configuration Report
• Logfile Report
• Phoneline Exceptions Report
Instructions to generate these reports are provided in Chapter 11, "System Information Reports."
15 System Security
Security for the administration function is extremely important. The system has numerous
features designed to provide security at the server and mailbox levels. These features address
system administration, mailbox usage, and access to facilities, applications and information. This
chapter deals with security and system administration.
Security and System Administration
Console
The system maintenance console—the main point of entry for configuration and administration—
is one of the most critical factors in security.
Console access is protected by a login sequence to verify a user before allowing access to
menus:
1. User ID
2. Console passcode
User ID
A user identifier, referred to as a user ID, is a unique representation of a person’s identity within
the system.
A user ID
• Is required as the first step to log in to the system.
During the login sequence you are identified by your user ID, the terminal device, and the
module where you log in.
• Consists of up to 17 alphanumeric characters.
Each user ID is associated with one real name, though one real name can be assigned
multiple-user IDs.
The server superuser (the system administrator) can display, on a system maintenance console,
all current user IDs, along with the names, passcodes, permission categories, and other statistics
associated with the IDs. (“Server Superuser”.)

The server superuser’s login user ID, "root", cannot be changed.
Console Passcode
A user ID can be verified by entering an optional passcode. The same passcode can be used
with different user IDs. The server superuser and console users each have their own passcode.
A console passcode
• Consists of 6 to 30 alphanumeric characters.
The letters may be upper or lowercase. Write down the passcode and store in a secure
place.
Note: If you forget the console passcode, you must enter a new one by using the Console program on the
Maintenance diskette. To use this program, you must perform a system shut down which terminates
call processing. After you access the console through this program, you must enter a new console
passcode, exit the program, then reset the system to resume call processing.
• Cannot contain a substring of the user ID that consists of four or more characters.
EXAMPLE: The user ID "mark61" cannot have the console passcode "markey4!" or "n=ark60" because
each contains a substring that is part of the user ID (indicated in bold characters).
• Cannot be reused.
When you change your passcode, it must be different from your old passcode.
• Requirements are strengthened when FPSA is implemented. See “FPSA Passcode

Restrictions”.
Each time you log in the system displays the date and time of your last login and the number of
unsuccessful attempts, if any, since your last login. You should review this information every time
you log in.
To Set a Console Passcode (without FPSA)

• Use the Passwords/Security option from the System Maintenance Menu, as discussed in
“Step 2: Passcode-Protect the Console”. If you forget your passcode, only the server
superuser can reset it.
Modem
A modem on a serial port of the system can be used by you, or anyone else, to gain access to all
system maintenance and configuration capabilities. You must protect this access point from
abuse. The same login sequence described in the previous section applies to any remote access
that uses the modem.
All systems are shipped from the factory with a default security banner. You can customize the
banner, if necessary. (“Step 3: Name Your Site”.)
Administrator’s Mailbox
The administrator’s mailbox can be used to perform several administration functions, including
the creation and deletion of mailboxes.
To protect the administrator’s mailbox:

• Change the mailbox number to any number up to 11 digits (you do not have to keep the
default setting).
If you change the administrator’s mailbox to a number with several digits, be sure the Dial
Plan allows it (or change the plan).
• Make a passcode a condition for successful login.
Note: The administrator’s mailbox must have a passcode; it cannot be the same as the mailbox number,
and it cannot be a trivial passcode (such as, 1234 or 8888).
• Set the FCOS to require an access code before callers can leave a message.
If the administrator’s mailbox number is not an integrated extension number, you must
access the mailbox by calling the system: press the * key (star) at the first greeting, enter the
administrator’s mailbox number, press the * key (star), and enter the passcode.
- If the FCOS requires an access code, you must enter it before you can press the second
* (star), thus adding a second level of passcode-type protection.
• Use FCOS settings to further restrict mailbox access to certain ports, or to deny login to the
mailbox (FCOS Category 2). Chapter 3, "Mailbox Reference Guide," provides FCOS
information.
Note: If you deny login to the mailbox, you must use the system's console to allow login prior to performing
any administration by phone (see Chapter 8, "Administration by Phone").
Security Reports and Audit Trails

Several reports available from the system console can indicate breaches in system security or
potential security abuse or concerns.
Mailbox Reports
Use the following reports and options to review security issues. For details on specific reports see
Chapter 11, "System Information Reports," and Chapter 12, "Statistics Reports."
• The Mailbox Dump Report can be run for specific mailboxes to obtain information about
mailbox activity, including login status and usage statistics.
• The Idle Mailboxes Report lists mailboxes with no activity. This listing contains any
unassigned or uninitialized mailboxes in the server.
• The Mailbox Totals Report gives the same type of information as the Idle Mailboxes Report,
except that it covers all mailboxes in the system.
• The Mailbox Data Inquiry Report provides summary statistics for a single mailbox or a range
of mailboxes.
• The Mailbox Data Report contains information on the number of recent failed login attempts
and on the date of the last mailbox owner login.
- Because this report covers all mailboxes and contains extensive information, it is the last
report used to examine potential abuse problems.
• Mailbox searches can locate mailboxes that meet certain criteria (such as those with a
specific FCOS or GCOS, or those without a passcode, or with the tutorial enabled).
- If you suspect system abuse, you can identify the mailboxes involved by performing a
search with the right criteria.

Audit Trail
If you are the server superuser, you can obtain an Audit Trail Report of all users logged in during
a specified period. (“Server Superuser”.)
After logging in, each subsequent activity performed during a session at a maintenance console
is recorded in the audit trail.
• Recorded information includes
- User ID
- Time and date of activity
- Menus reached
- Actions taken
- Additional details you specify
• Only the server superuser can configure and manage an audit trail
• Audit trail options include
- Start and stop the audit trail
- Review the audit trail report; each activity is recorded as a separate numbered entry
- Specify the maximum entries (up to 999,999) in an audit trail
- Specify the type of information that comprises an entry (entry details)
- Specify a range of entries to report
• The audit trail resembles the system Logfile, but it does not need to be cleared.
- When the specified maximum number of entries is reached, the server continues to
record new information, overwriting the oldest information and beginning again at entry 1.
• The system issues a warning, in the error log, when the number of entries reaches 85%, 90%
and 95% of the maximum.
Functionally Partitioned System Administration (FPSA)

Functionally Partitioned System Administration (FPSA) is a standard software feature that
requires you to enter your user ID and console passcode for verification, before you can reach
any of the system menus.
With FPSA activated and configured, system security is assured because access can be
restricted to authorized persons only. Access to menus is based on the authorization level
(permission category) of user ID and console passcode (“Permission Categories”). There is no
charge for FPSA; however, it must be specifically ordered.
Activating FPSA
Before FPSA is operational, you must activate it at your site from the Passwords/Security Menu
(enter P from the System Maintenance Menu), then configure it as desired. Activate and
deactivate FPSA by using the FPSA diskette at the system maintenance console.
When activating FPSA, take note:

• All current user IDs must be given permission categories (see Permission Categories.)

• Each user ID must be given a console passcode.
- If a user ID has a passcode, it is marked to expire in 24 hours; the user should be notified
to change it.
• User IDs without console passcodes are given temporary passcodes by the server;
passcodes are marked to expire in 24 hours.
- The server superuser should inform users of these passcodes.
- This forces users to change their passcodes when they log in.
• Once FPSA is activated, you can reach menus at the console only if you have the proper
permission category (or categories).
- Every system menu is associated with one or more permission category. See Table 15-1.
• When activation is complete, the "Passwords/Security" option in the System Maintenance
Menu changes to "FPSA Menu."
To Activate FPSA
1. Enter P to access the Passwords/Security Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter F to activate FPSA.
The system prompts you to insert the FPSA diskette.
3. Insert the FPSA diskette into the server floppy disk drive and press <Enter>.
The system prompts:
Enter "Y" to activate FPSA,

Enter "N" to abort:
4. Enter Y to continue the activation process.
The system takes you through all current user IDs.
Be ready to take notes on this information. You are asked to provide permission categories
for each user ID.
5. Enter up to five permission categories, numbers 2 to 6 (separate each by a comma).
You must enter all the categories desired, not just the category that you are adding (or
deleting).
EXAMPLE: To add category 6 to categories 4 and 5, enter 4,5,6. See Table 15-1, for permission
categories.
6. Note user IDs that are assigned temporary passcodes. Write these passcodes down and
distribute them to the users.
Note: Both temporary and existing passcodes created during FPSA activation expire within 24 hours.
After the system processes the information you enter, it displays:
FPSA activated. It will take effect the next time users log in. Press any key to continue...
7. Remove the FPSA diskette from the floppy disk drive.
When you exit the System Maintenance Menu, the Passwords/Security option changes to
"FPSA Menu".
You can now configure FPSA through this option.

Configuring FPSA
Once activated, configuring FPSA involves the following steps:
• Establish a user ID.
• Identify the users by their real names.
• Establish a passcode.
• Assign permission categories.
• Set an audit trail, if desired.
• Configure passcode parameters.
Configuring is performed through the FPSA Menu option of the System Maintenance Menu.
Detailed procedures are provided in Chapter 10 of Reference and Configuration.
FPSA Passcode Restrictions

When FPSA is installed, additional restrictions apply to console passcodes.
• Passcodes must contain at least one letter, one digit, and one punctuation mark.
EXAMPLE: "13nuts)c" or "o;ster1".

• Passcodes must be changed periodically (the default is 30 days).
The new passcode must differ from the old one. The server superuser can set the period
between passcode changes and the period for displaying warnings.
• Additional login attempts are allowed when passcodes are entered incorrectly.
The server superuser sets the number of attempts allowed before the system locks the user
ID.
- Default is five attempts.
- If a user ID becomes locked, only the server superuser can unlock it.
- No indication is given to a user on lockout.
Note: The number of bad login attempts is counted from midnight to midnight of the following day; it is
cleared and restarted each midnight.
• Temporary passcodes, assigned by the server superuser, must be changed during the first
login sessions.
• Forgotten passcodes for server superuser accounts can be handled using the procedure to
bypass the login sequence (see “Server Superuser”).
Permission Categories
When FPSA is activated, only users with the appropriate permission categories can perform
menu-based procedures described in the system manuals. You can use any of six permission
categories to establish privileges for each user ID. Categories and users are defined in Table 15-
1 "FPSA Permission Categories".
Table 15-1 FPSA Permission Categories
Category Description

1 Unlimited access to all console menus and all server resources (synonymous with
server superuser access).
2 Unlimited access to all console menus and QNX shell, except security features
limited to the server superuser.
3 Access only to system configuration menus except network configuration
(see Category 6).
4 Access only to mailbox maintenance menus.
5 Access only to inquiry menus
(read-only menus, such as Reports, Statistics, and Dump).
6 Access only to network and network-related menus.
Server Superuser
The server superviser is the only person with unlimited access to all system resources and all
menus. This person is the only one who can perform all activities described in the system
manuals, including the following FPSA activities:
• Add a user to the system
• Delete a user from the system
• Reset a user’s passcode
• Change permission categories
• Configure passcode parameters
• Configure and manage the Audit Trail (see Audit Trail)
The user ID "root" is the only server superuser.
If the server superuser forgets a console passcode, the server cannot be accessed and FPSA
activities cannot be performed. A server superuser can only be reinstated by performing the
passcode bypass procedure. (See "Bypass Passcode Requirement for Server Superuser":
Chapter 10, Reference and Configuration.)
NuPoint Voice Superuser

NuPoint Voice superusers can perform all activities described in the system manuals, except
FPSA activities. However, to change their own passcodes, they can access the Change
Password option in the Passcode Menu (enter P from the System Maintenance Menu). This form
of user has Category 2 permission (see Table 15-1).
Console User
Console users can configure the server, maintain mailboxes, obtain reports, administer the
network, or perform any combination of these activities, depending on their permission
categories. Console users can change their own passcodes.
Deactivating FPSA
You can deactivate FPSA only with the FPSA diskette at the system maintenance console.
Remember that once FPSA is deactivated, anyone who can log in to the system can access the
menus.

To Deactivate FPSA
1. Enter P to access the Passwords/Security Menu from the System Maintenance Menu.
2. Enter F to deactivate FPSA.
The system prompts you to insert the FPSA diskette.
3. Insert the FPSA diskette into the server floppy disk drive, and press <Enter>.
The system prompts:
Enter "Y" to deactivate FPSA

Enter "N" to abort:
4. Enter Y to deactivate FPSA.
FPSA deactivated. Press any key to continue...

5. Remove the FPSA diskette from the floppy disk drive.
When you exit the System Maintenance Menu, the Passwords/Security option changes to
"Passcode"
Appendix A - System Administrator’s Quick Reference Card
To Modify a mailbox
• Enter M to access the Mailbox Maintenance Menu from the Main Menu.
• Enter M to modify mailbox parameters.
• Enter the number of the mailbox to modify.
• Enter new values for the existing parameters.
Press <Enter> to leave any value unchanged.
• Enter another mailbox number to modify.
or
To log into the console

• Type root (lowercase letters) at the login prompt.
• Type your console passcode.
If you do not have a passcode, you will be logged in at this point.
* Press <Enter> to display a complete menu when the shortened version is displayed.
* Press CTRL-Q to continue console functions when the system appears “locked”.

To change the console passcode
• Enter S to access the System Maintenance Menu from the Main Menu.
• Enter P to access the console Passwords/Security Menu.
• Enter C to change the console passcode.
• Type a passcode.
Choose a passcode with 6 to 30 alphanumeric characters; upper or lowercase letters.

• Type the passcode again.
• Enter X to exit this menu.
To change a user’s passcode

• Enter P to set or clear a passcode.
• Enter the desired mailbox number.
• Enter a new passcode.
Choose a passcode with 4 to 10 digits (Ø to 9).
or
Press <Enter> to leave passcode unchanged.
or
Enter Ø (zero) to clear an existing passcode.
or
Enter S to make passcode the same number as the mailbox number.
or
Enter R for a random generated number.
To enable / disable the tutorial

• Enter Y to enable the tutorial
(if the user has not logged into the mailbox).
or
Enter N if the user has already set up the mailbox.
• Press <Enter> to return to the Mailbox Maintenance Menu.
To create a mailbox

• Enter C to create a new mailbox.
• Enter the number of the mailbox to create.
This number must conform to the mailbox dialing plan for your system.
• Respond to each of the system prompts; press <Enter> after each entry.
Press <Enter> to leave an item blank.
To create a range of mailboxes respond appropriately to each of the prompts; these are
outlined in Chapter 4 of the System Administrator’s Guide.
To delete a mailbox
• Enter D to delete mailbox(es).
To delete a single mailbox

• Enter the number of the mailbox to delete.
• Enter Y to delete the mailbox.
Press <Enter>.
or
Enter N to leave the mailbox unchanged.

• Enter another mailbox number to delete.
or
To delete a range of mailboxes

• Enter the first and last numbers in the range to delete, separated with a hyphen (e.g., 101-
203).
• Type delete (lowercase letters).
• Enter Y to delete this range of mailboxes after you ensure that the numbers are correct.
• Enter another mailbox number to delete.
or
Appendix B - Glossary of Terms

Access code

A dial string used by the pager application. See Pager system.
ACD - Automatic Call Distributor
Automatic Call Distributor; a specialized phone system used for handling a large number of
incoming calls, which includes recorded announcements, routing, and call data logging.
Active configuration
The online configuration currently in use. Any changes you make to non-hardware settings while
in the active configuration take effect immediately. Contrast with Inactive configuration. See also
Online configuration.
Administration by phone
The capability to perform certain system administrative functions through a telephone set instead
of the system maintenance console. This is usually done by the system administrator.
Administrator
Person responsible for day-to-day system implementation, changes and maintenance.
Administrator’s mailbox
Special mailbox belonging to the system administrator, with system-wide abilities.
Affinity group
See GCOS
Alternate MWI
A “backup” message waiting indicator, used when the mailbox owner does not respond to the
primary MWI.
Alternate pager
A “backup” pager, used when the mailbox owner does not respond to the primary pager; also, a
mailbox configuration parameter that sets message delivery.
AMIS - Audio Messaging Interchange Specification
Audio Messaging Interchange Specification; a council set up to develop a standard for exchange
of voice messages between different vendors. Used with the AMIS Analog Optional Feature.
Analog networking
Networking scheme that reconverts voice messages to analog signals for transmission between
two or more voice messaging systems. Voice messages are sent over regular telephone lines.

Append
Add comments to the end of a message.
Answer
Send a new message to a user in response to the original message.
Application
A set of voice processing functions assigned to a line group. The NuPoint Voice application is an
example.
ATB - All Trunks Busy
Condition when every port in a line group is busy simultaneously. The number of times, and for
how long (seconds) the ATB condition occurs is shown in the Group Usage Report (also called
Line Groups - ATB Report).
Attendant
Person responsible for handling live telephone calls, such as a switchboard operator.
Attendant’s mailbox
Special mailbox belonging to the system attendant, with system-wide abilities.
Billed outdial index
See Outdial index.
Bitmapped group
See GCOS.
Broadcast mailbox
Mailbox address that sends simultaneous messages to a group of users without requiring use of
a distribution list. The distribution list assigned to the broadcast mailbox determines which users
get the broadcast message.
Callers
People who do not have voice mailboxes on the system, also called “outside callers.” Callers
usually have fewer call processing options than users (mailbox owners). Callers can call in to
extensions, route their calls to other extensions and listen to greetings; they may also be able to
leave messages.
Call placement

The ability to send a message to an outside telephone number instead of a mailbox.
Call placement pager access type
Used with call placement, this works the same as the access type for a pager. It is stored in the
user’s mailbox.
Centrex
Central Exchange; a business telephone system where the equipment is at the CO instead of at
the customer site.
Check-in mailbox
A mailbox used in the hotel/motel environment to record names and passcodes for guests.
Check-out mailbox
A mailbox used in the hotel/motel environment to clear a recorded name, and any messages
stored in the guest’s mailbox.
Child mailboxes
Mailboxes assigned to distribution lists of parent mailboxes (for example, Broadcast, Tree, and
Rotational mailboxes). Child mailboxes can give information to users and callers, or can connect
users and callers to other extensions and allow them to make messages.
CO - Central Office
Central Office (of a telephone company).
Confidential message
A message that cannot be given to another user.
Console
See System maintenance console.
Console password
See Passcode.
Console user
When FPSA is activated, persons who have access to the Change Password option in the FPSA
Menu and to all options in any combination of other menus except the network configuration
menus. This classification is the most restricted level of access.

CTI card
See Smartcard.
Cut-Through Paging
An optional feature that allows a caller to page a user by entering a telephone number on the
keypad. The telephone number will then be displayed on the user’s pager. Also called the CTP
feature.
Day and night programming
A feature of the NuPoint Voice application that sets the work schedule and handles certain
situations such as a user wishing to speak to an attendant.
Default
The value a parameter takes if not specifically changed by the administrator.
Dial-by-Name
A capability of the NuPoint Voice application that allows someone to leave a message for a user
without knowing the user’s mailbox number. The caller can enter the user’s name on the keypad.
Users’ names are stored in the Dial-by-Name database.
Dialing plan
A numerical structure of how mailbox numbers are assigned, and their length; must be defined to
configure each application. Also used to determine which digit implements a capability, such as
call placement.
Dial string
Group of alphanumeric characters dialed or outdialed by the system. Often used to facilitate call
transfers. Outdialing is used in the Pager application.
DID - Direct Inward Dialing
Direct Inward Dialing; routes outside calls to a specific station without operator or attendant
assistance.
DID Line
Direct Inward Dialing Line; a trunk line that accepts incoming calls only. You cannot use this line
to make outcalls or transfers. If you try to make an outcall or transfer a call, you will not get a dial
tone. This trunk line uses E & M signaling and requires special trunk circuits from the telephone
company, and interfacing circuitry for the system.
DID NuPoint Voice application

A NuPoint Voice application that handles DID lines.
Digit absorption
Used by DID NuPoint Voice, this process ignores leading DN digits not needed for a user’s
extension or mailbox number.
Digit offset
Used by DID NuPoint Voice, this process adds digits to or subtracts digits from the DN to
correspond a user’s extension or mailbox number.
Digital networking
Networking method that transmits voice messages to remote systems as digital files.
Distribution list
A group of mailboxes that receive the same message. Distribution lists allow users to send the
same message to a number of recipients at the same time. Users and the system administrator
can assign mailbox numbers to distribution lists.
DN - Directory number
Directory number; a telephone number.
DTMF - Dual tone multifrequency signaling
Dual Tone Multifrequency; the sounds created by pressing the keys on a pushbutton telephone.
E&M
A type of tie trunk. Also the signaling method used for this and for other types of trunks. The term
is derived from the use of the E and M (ear and mouth) leads forming part of the trunk equipment,
and taken respectively to denote the receive and transmit leads. The two leads are used to pass
supervisory conditions over the trunk. The E lead receives, the M lead transmits.
ESMDI - Enhance Simplified Message Desk Interface
Enhanced Simplified Message Desk Interface; a standard call data packet format used in Centrex
applications, with additional features not found in SMDI. Used in unified integrations.
NuPoint Fax
A system feature. A NuPoint Fax group is a set of fax ports on the same MVIP bus. Line groups
can be assigned to a NuPoint Fax group so the fax resources are shared.
FCOS - Feature Class of Service
Feature Class of Service; a combination of features. By assigning an FCOS to a mailbox, the

administrator determines what capabilities a mailbox has.
Feature bit
The smallest unit of system mailbox capability, also called a feature or an FCOS bit (avoid the
latter term as is often confused with FCOS). Each feature bit has a number and a name.
Example: Feature bit 053 (Keep messages), allows users to store messages in their mailboxes
after they have played them. You cannot assign an individual feature bit to a mailbox; you must
assign a feature bit to an FCOS and assign the FCOS to the mailbox. See also FCOS.
FPSA
Functionally Partitioned System Administration; system software that prevents unauthorized

changes and offers enhanced system security.
Frequency
Pager frequency; the maximum number of times that the system re-pages; programmed when the
mailbox is created. Works with the pager interval. See also Interval.
Full-screen interface
Several options are combined in one menu choice. Allows entry of data in the same application
by using an on-screen entry list. Function keys are used to adjust options. (Useful for an 11-page
entry screen that lists billing rates, for example.) Contrast with Scrolling-menu interface.
Functionally Partitioned System Administration
See FPSA.
Give
Ability to send an existing message to another user.
Greeting
Information meant to welcome callers when they reach system software or a mailbox. Typically,
callers hear a general company greeting, directions for using the system, and a greeting from a
user, when they call from outside the system. Administrators, attendants and users can record
greetings.
Greeting-only mailbox
Mailbox that does not allow callers to leave a message. See also Information-only mailbox.
GCOS - Group Class of Service
Group Class of Service; a method of restricting communication between mailboxes. By assigning

a GCOS to each mailbox, the administrator determines which users can exchange messages.
There are two types: affinity GCOS and bitmapped GCOS. An affinity GCOS consists only of a

GCOS number, whereas a bitmapped GCOS is a set of groups. A bitmapped GCOS can have 0
to 128 groups.
Group
A component of a bitmapped GCOS. A single group has no intrinsic meaning; it simply acts as
an “on/off” switch within a bitmapped GCOS. You cannot assign an individual group to a mailbox;
you must assign a group to a bitmapped GCOS. See also GCOS.
Guest mailbox
A temporary mailbox set up by a subscriber for guests. Used in the hotel/motel environment.
Hard play prompt
An instruction from the NuPoint Voice application that cannot be interrupted by pressing a key on
the telephone keypad. The keypress must send a DTMF tone before it will interrupt the
instruction. See also Prompts.
Host
See Module.
Idle mailbox
A mailbox that has been created and assigned but which has not yet been logged into.
Inactive configuration
The online configuration in reserve. This option is a duplicate version of the configuration used to
make system changes; then the configuration is activated to implement changes made, both
online (active) and offline. Contrast with Active configuration. See also Online configuration.
Information-only mailbox
Mailboxes with Greeting-only, Chain, and Time Classes of Service (and any additional FCOS that
issue greetings and do not receive outside caller messages) are collectively referred to as
Information-only mailboxes.
Integration
Hardware and software used to interface the system with a specific PBX or switch. (Example:
allows the NuPoint Voice application to know what telephone number was originally dialed.)
Internal outdial index
See Outdial index.
Interval

Pager interval; the maximum length of time that the system waits before re-paging when the
previous page was successful; programmed when the mailbox is created. Default pager interval
is 30 minutes. Works with the pager frequency. See also Frequency.
Keep
The ability to store a message for future playing.
Keypad
The set of pushbuttons on a telephone set.
LCOS - Limits Class of Service
Limits Class of Service; a set of options that restricts the capabilities of a mailbox. By assigning
an LCOS to each mailbox, the administrator determines the controls, or limits, on a mailbox.
Limit
A single restriction on one of the capabilities of a mailbox. Limits may be on such things as time
length of messages and number of messages per mailbox. You cannot assign an individual limit
to a mailbox; you must assign an LCOS.
Line
Telephone line input to a system port.
Line card
Hardware circuit board in a system with ports for each telephone line. The line card interfaces
between the caller and system software.
Line group
A set of one or more incoming telephone lines, which come into line card ports on the server
hardware. Line groups are assigned to specific applications such as the NuPoint Voice
application or the Pager application.
Log in
The process of entering (1) a passcode from the telephone keypad to use various system
functions from within a mailbox; or (2) a user ID then a password at a system maintenance
console to gain access to menus, if FPSA is activated; or (3) a user ID and then an optional
password at a system maintenance console to gain access to menus, if FPSA is not activated.
(Login is used as a noun or an adjective.)
Log out
The process of exiting (1) a mailbox by entering the proper command from the telephone keypad;
or (2) from the system maintenance console by entering X to exit from the Main Menu. (Logout is

used as a noun or an adjective.)
Mailbox
The area set apart for each user’s messages, distribution lists, and other options.
Mailbox owner distribution list
A distribution list created by a user, assigned to that user’s mailbox, and not accessible to any
other system user.
Mailbox passcode
See Passcode.
Main Menu
The first and top-level set of choices that the NuPoint Voice application offers people who have
voice mailboxes in the system and are logged into them (for example, users).
Maintenance console
Master feature bit
A feature bit that must be included in an FCOS in order for related features to work. Example: if
you include feature bit 021 (Make and request receipt) in an FCOS, you must also include the
master feature bit 020 (Make messages).
Master distribution list
A distribution list created by an Administrator (assigned to the Administrator’s mailbox),

accessible to many users with the proper FCOS.
Menu parameter
A particular menu choice whose value you can alter through the system console.
MESA - Modular Expandable System Architecture
Modular Expandable System Architecture; the capability to expand or enhance a system by

adding more modules.
NP Forms
Voice forms; question and answer mailboxes.
NP Net

An optional feature used for digital networking a system.
Message
Also voice message; a voice recording left by users and callers in a mailbox, and stored by the
system.
Message delivery
A message waiting indication that places a telephone call to a user, asks for a passcode, and
plays the user’s messages.
Message of the day
The “message of the day” is actually a greeting; mailbox users hear it when they log in. This
greeting is stored in the attendant’s mailbox.
Message waiting indicator/indication
See MWI.
Message waiting type
A number used to indicate which form of MWI is being used by a particular mailbox.
MITEL NUPOINT MESSENGER system
The hardware and software used to run the NuPoint Voice application or Voice Gateway
products; a voice processing system that provides multiple messaging capabilities. Sometimes
referred to as an AIP (Adaptive Information Processing) system.
MODEM (modem)
MOdulator-DEModulator; a piece of Data Communications Equipment (DCE) that accepts data

signals from a piece of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and converts them into modulated tone
signals suitable for transmission over telephone lines. The DCE at the far end converts the tone
signals back into data signals and sends them to its DTE. The data circuit is commonly a duplex
circuit; it is capable of operation in both directions simultaneously.
Module
An individual processor (CPU) and attached components on a system. The server can have
between one and four modules. Modules are sometimes called “hosts.”
MVIP - Multi-Vendor Integration Protocol
MWI - Message Waiting Indicator/Indication
Message waiting indication/indicator; a way to inform users of new messages. Examples include
pagers and message waiting lights. There are three message waiting indication (MWI)

parameters for each mailbox, and each can have both a primary MWI and an alternate MWI.
NCOS - Network Class of Service
Network Class of Service; a mailbox option that controls access to network features. Examples:
the ability to send, receive, or give messages across the network, and the ability to access urgent
or batch queues when sending messages.
New user tutorial
See Standard tutorial.
NPA
A communications industry term for the area code of a DN.
NPA/NXX Screening
A communications industry term for restricting telephone calls based on the area code and
exchange. See NPA, NXX, and RCOS.
NXX
A communications industry term for the exchange (prefix) of a DN. The exchange follows the area
code and is a grouping of telephone numbers coming from the same CO.
Offline configuration
One of two types of system configuration. Offline configuration handles hardware system settings
that cannot be changed immediately. This includes line groups. Contrast with Online
configuration.
Off-system Messaging
See Call placement.
NP View
Optional feature that allows personal computer users to send, receive, create, edit, and store
voice and fax messages in the Microsoft Windows environment.
Online configuration
One of two types of system configuration. Online configuration includes system settings that can
be modified at any time. There are two types of online configuration: active and inactive. Contrast
with Offline configuration. See also Active configuration, Inactive configuration.
Optional feature
A capability that is not included in the base system software, and must be specifically configured.

Outcall
See Outdial.
Outdial
Creation of DTMF tones by the system when it originates a telephone call, such as when paging
a user.
Outdial index
Comprises the first part of the dial string. A number from 0 to 15 (up to 24 characters) that tells
which pager system to use. There are three available outdial indexes: internal, billed, and
unbilled. This code is set up in a user’s mailbox and indicates what the user should dial before the
destination telephone number. Formerly called “pager system access code index.”
Pager
The device activated by a paging system; also radio pager.
Pager application
The application that allows paging, message delivery, and call placement.
Pager number
A dial string used to dial a pager. Used with the outdial index and the post-pager number, all
three are stored in the user’s mailbox.
Pager/paging system
A dial string used to access a group of pagers. This information is stored when configuring the
Pager application. Referred to by the outdial index, and used with the pager number and post-
pager number to reach a particular pager. Sometimes called “access code.”
Pager system access code
See Outdial index.
Paging
Process where the system outdials a pager number to activate a user’s pager when a new
message is received.
Parent mailbox
Mailbox that routes users and callers to child mailboxes. Parent mailboxes must contain a
distribution list so that the system knows how to route users and callers. Parent mailboxes can be
Broadcast, Tree, or Rotational mailboxes.

Passcode
Used, in this guide, as a generic term that refers to both (a) a console password: a system
security feature consisting of an alphanumeric code required during login to verify a user’s access
to the system menus; and (b) a mailbox passcode: a mailbox security feature that requires a
numeric security code to verify a mailbox owner’s access to a mailbox (whether FPSA is activated
or not).
PBX - Private Branch Exchange
Private Branch Exchange; a business telephone system, usually on premises, that switches calls
from public telephone network to stations in the system.
Permission category
When FPSA is activated, one of five levels of access that the server superuser assigns to
NuPoint Voice superusers and console users. At least one category is associated with a user ID
and every system menu.
Phoneline exceptions
Parameters that tell the NuPoint Voice application how to handle phone lines, in terms of dialing
speed, voltages, etc.
Play message
To listen to a voice message.
Played message
A message which the user has heard and decides to keep.
PMS - Property Management System
Property Management System; integrated with a system, allows message creation directly from
the PMS.
Port
A physical hardware connection. A system port is the physical telephone line connection to the
system. Port numbering starts at 0, the upper limit depends on the type of line card. See also
Serial port.
Post-pager number
A dial string used to control a pager, either to display a set of numbers or to enter special codes.
Used with the outdial index and the pager number, all three of which are stored in the user’s
mailbox.
Primary MWI

The message waiting indication that is signaled when a mailbox receives a new message. If an
alternate MWI is also defined, it is signaled if the user does not respond by calling into the
system.
Primary pager
The pager that is signaled when a mailbox receives a new message. If an alternate pager is also
defined, it is signaled if the user does not respond by calling into the system.
Prompts
Recorded instructions that offer options to users and callers. For example, after users and callers
reach a mailbox, they may hear the prompt, “Record your message.” Prompts can be given in
foreign languages (an optional feature). See also Hard play and Soft play prompts.
Queue
A group of related messages. Each mailbox should have a queue for unplayed messages, played
messages, receipts, and urgent messages.
Receipt
Notification to a user about a message’s status.
NP Receptionist
Feature that allows callers and users to reach extensions by keypad inputs. This is the only
application that can be assigned to a line group that already has an another application
configured.
Return receipt
Request by a user for notification when a sent message has been played.
RCOS - Restriction Class of Service
Restriction Class of Service; a parameter assigned to mailboxes which limit what telephone
numbers they can outdial. Limits are placed on the area codes or exchanges a mailbox can
outdial. See NPA/NXX screening.
RNA - Ring No Answer
Ring No Answer; a condition where an extension rings but no one answers the telephone.
Rotational mailbox
Information-only mailbox whose prompts are changed on time or usage-sensitive basis.
Scrolling-menu interface

Several options generate a set of prompts to answer, one at a time. Allows entry of data by using
specific menus (for example, billing rates are set through different menus, depending upon the
type of rate). Functions on all types of terminals. Contrast with Full-screen interface.
Second dial tone
A user making a trunk call through a PABX usually receives dial tone after the handset is
removed, and then dial tone from the CO after the trunk access code has been dialed. However,
the ARS (Automatic Route Selection) feature of the SX-200 LIGHT PABX would mask the CO
dial tone, because the outpulsing sequences are isolated from the user. To prevent confusion, a
second dial tone can be provided to the user by the SX-200 LIGHT PABX (as a programmable
option) at the appropriate point in the outpulsing sequence.
Serial port
A physical interface to a serial data connection. There are two types of serial port, CPU (default)
and Smartcard. See also Serial port index.
Serial port index
A numeric pointer to the serial port number to be used by an application. This number can be 1 or
2. Each serial port can then be assigned to a device name. See Serial port number.
Serial port number
A number assigned to a serial port index that points to a device name. For a CPU serial port, the
number 1 or 2 will refer to $term1 or $term2. For a Smartcard, the numbers 1 through 32 refer to
names $cti1 through $cti32.
Server
The system server; the set of hardware and software used for adaptive information processing
(AIP); used to run applications, including NuPoint Voice, DID, Pager.
Server administrator
Also called system administrator. See Administrator.
Server greeting
See System greeting.
Server maintenance console
Server superuser
The only person who has unlimited access to all system menus, when FPSA is activated. This
classification is the widest level of access. Also called System superuser.

Shared extension mailbox
A kind of tree mailbox used when several people share one telephone. Each user has a personal
mailbox, which is a child mailbox of the shared extension (parent) mailbox. Callers leave a
message by pressing a digit to choose a user.
Site tutorial
A company-specified tutorial that you can create for your users. It is a form of greeting.
Smartcard
A serial data communications card, also known as a CTI card. Allows up to 32 serial ports to the
system.
SMDI - Simplified Message Desk Interface
Simplified Message Desk Interface; a standard call data packet format used in Centrex
applications.
Soft play prompt
An instruction from the NuPoint Voice application that can be interrupted by pressing a key on the
telephone keypad. The keypress must send a DTMF tone to the system before it will interrupt the
instruction. See also Prompts.
Speech blocks
The maximum number of speech storage units that each system has available on the hard disk.
This number depends on the storage hour capacity of the hard disk. Mailbox names, greetings,
prompts, and distribution list names also consume speech storage blocks.
Standard tutorial
A default tutorial that is set to play when a new mailbox is created and logged into for the first
time. Sometimes called user tutorial, new user tutorial, and NuPoint Voice tutorial.
Station
Telephone set.
System administrator
See Administrator.
System attendant
See Attendant.
System configuration

The particular hardware and software initially installed for the system. Any subsequent additions,
deletions and any other changes which occur result in a new system configuration being created.
The listing of hardware and software items which comprise the current system configuration can
be obtained on command from the system maintenance console.
System maintenance console
The video display monitor and keyboard (the terminal) connected to the system. The main point
of entry for system configuration and administration. Also called Server maintenance console, or
system maintenance console.
System greeting
Initial greeting heard by callers who dial into a voice processing system. Also called Server
greeting.
System superuser
See Server superuser.
TCOS - Tenant Class of Service
Tenant Class of Service; a mailbox option used with the SMDI integration. This feature governs
mailbox interaction between user communities.
TDD - Telecommunications Device for the Deaf
Telecommunications Device for the Deaf; a terminal used by a hearing-impaired person to

communicate over telephone lines. A TDD operator relays information from the TDD to another
party, and types in any spoken information, which is sent back to the TDD.
NP TDD
An optional feature for the system that furnishes English prompts for a TDD. This functionality
allows the hearing-impaired to use the system software.
Tie trunk
Private telephone circuit used to connect two or more telephone systems together, or to connect
a telephone system to a voice processing system. See also E & M.
Time stamp
Voice prompts that inform a user of the time and date each message was recorded.
Tip & Ring
Telephony term for the ground (tip) and positive (ring) wires in an electrical circuit. Also known as
Tip-Ring or T-R.

Transfer
Moving a call from one station to another within a telephone network or site.
Tree mailbox
Mailbox that routes users and callers to child mailboxes, based on keypad input. Tree mailboxes
must contain a distribution list so that the system knows how to route users and callers.
Triplet
A set of three numbers in each line (or port) in a group; identifies the module (host) number (1-4),
the line card slot number (0-15), and the port number (starting at 0) on the line card. Maintains
the format module:slot:port (for example, 1:2:5).
Trunk
A telephone communication channel between two points, where one is usually the CO or
switching center.
Tutorial
A user option which is a series of detailed prompts that guides the user through simple mailbox
operation.
Unbilled outdial index
See Outdial index.
Unplayed message
A message that has not been played (heard) by the user.
Urgent message
A message that is played before normal messages. Messages marked Urgent are put in a
different queue and can be treated differently.
User
Also called “mailbox user.” A person who has one or more voice mailboxes in the system and is
logged into it. Users may have extensive call processing options, such as play messages, answer
messages, give messages, keep messages and use distribution lists. Contrast with System
superuser, NuPoint Voice superuser, and Console user.
User distribution list
See Mailbox owner distribution list.
User ID

User identifier; a system security feature consisting of a unique identifier up to 17 alphanumeric
characters required as the first step to log in to the system. The system superuser, each NuPoint
Voice superuser, and each console user has a user ID.
User options
Choices that the system announces to users during a call. When a user may press the U key (8
on the keypad) while listening to the main menu, the system presents the user with some or all of
these options: name, greeting, passcode, distribution lists, tutorial, pagers.
User tutorial
See Standard tutorial.
Voice Gateway application
An IVR (Interactive Voice Response) software package for the system that provides an interface
between the telephone and your data processing system (computer).
NuPoint Voice application
The basic software package for the system that provides voice messaging. See also server.
NuPoint Voice Superuser
When FPSA is activated, persons who have access to the Change Password option in the FPSA
Menu and to all options in all other menus. This classification is the second-widest level of
access.
Voice message
See Message.
Voice messaging
See Voice processing.
Voice processing
Generic term for any equipment that can handle voice messages from callers.

System Administrators Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Administrators Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation - Release 7.

System Administrator's Guide

Contents ©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation

P.O. Box 1899

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 1

Additional administrative responsibilities may include the following activities:

This manual contains Instructions on how to perform these functions.

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 2

2 First Administration Session

Step 1: Activate the Console

Using //1/dev/ser1. Last login: Fri Feb 9 10:14:48 1996.

If you need help later, type ?

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 3

How Do I Display the Complete Menu?

My System is Locked; How Do I Continue?

Step 2: Passcode-Protect the Console

2. Enter S to access the System Maintenance Menu.

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 4

(U) System Verify

3. Enter P to access the console Passwords/Security Menu.

4. Enter C to change the console passcode.

The system prompts you to re-enter the new passcode.

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 5

Step 3: Name Your Site

3. Enter N to change the site name.

Enter Y to change the name; or

5. Enter C to change the site code.

If you entered N, continue to Step 8.

8. Enter B to change the site banner.

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 6

enter the new site banner (up to 240 characters long).

Press <Enter> to make this field blank.

The system returns to the shortened System Maintenance Menu.

Step 4: Run the Configuration Report

1. Enter R for Report Generation from the Main Menu.

Step 5: Select a Report Destination

Enter C to send the report to the console without pausing.

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 7

Enter 1 to send the report to serial port #1.

Enter 2 to send the report to serial port #2.

Enter F to send the report to a file on the system.

Enter A to append the report to an existing file on the system.

Enter X to exit report output options (no report).

The system displays the report, 24 lines at a time;

What Should I Do When a Printer Port is Selected Accidentally?

How Do I Control Scrolling During Video Console Display?

• CTRL-S to stop scrolling

When viewing a report:

Step 6: Read the Configuration Report

Figure 2-1 Sample Configuration Report

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 8

EXAMPLE: Dial Plan = 4, 0, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 5, 3

2. Administrator and Attendant

Administrator’s mailbox has special privileges:

Attendant’s mailbox has special privileges:

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 9

See Chapter 6, "Recording Messages/Greetings/Tutorials."

See "Record the Company Greeting".

4. Message Waiting Indicators (MWI)

If the report says: "Key 0 for attendant transfer during greeting=(Y)"

©Copyright 2002, Mitel Networks Corporation 10

7. Day and Night/Weekend hours

10. Dial an Extension for Callers